hit counter script
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Series Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Canon Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255
  6. Service manual

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Series Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Series:
1
2
3
Table Of Contents
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

December 3, 2015
Revision 9
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 Series
Service Manual
Product Overvew
Technology
Periodical Service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error•Jam•Alarm
Service Mode
Installation
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Series

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 Series

  • Page 1 December 3, 2015 Revision 9 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 Series Service Manual Product Overvew Technology Periodical Service Parts Replacement and Cleaning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error•Jam•Alarm Service Mode Installation Appendix...
  • Page 2 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the edition of this manual.
  • Page 3 Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.

  • Page 4: Table Of Contents

    Contents Safety Precautions Technology Laser Safety --------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Basic Configuration -----------------------------------------------------------2-2 Handling of Laser System --------------------------------------------------0-2 Functional Configuration --------------------------------------------------------- 2-2 Turn power switch ON -------------------------------------------------------0-3 Controller System ------------------------------------------------------------2-5 Safety of Toner -----------------------------------------------------------------0-3 Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5 About Toner ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3 Controls -----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12 Toner on Clothing or Skin -------------------------------------------------------- 0-3 Service Operations ---------------------------------------------------------------2-30 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery --------------------------------0-4...
  • Page 5 Cleaning Parts --------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11 Installing an MEAP Application ---------------------------------------------- 2-134 MEAP Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-138 Parts Replacement and Cleaning MEAP Application Management -------------------------------------------- 2-140 Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-149 List of Parts ---------------------------------------------------------------------4-2 System Application Management ------------------------------------------- 2-161 List of Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2 Setting the method to login to SMS ---------------------------------------- 2-164 List of Main Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 MEAP Application System Information ------------------------------------ 2-167...
  • Page 6 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) ------------------------------ 4-117 Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet -------- 4-177 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) ------------------------- 4-119 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly --------------------------- 4-179 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ------------------------- 4-123 Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller ---------------------------------------------- 4-179 Reinstalling the ITB ------------------------------------------------------------- 4-126 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller ----------------------------------------- 4-180...
  • Page 7 Image Formation System ---------------------------------------------------5-5 Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow ------------------------------------ 6-114 Developing Assembly ------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow------------------- 6-116 Patch sensor ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-5 Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow --------------------------------- 6-118 ITB Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow ----------------------------------- 6-121 ITB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight --- 6-122...
  • Page 8 Service Mode When Using the Parts Included in the Package---------------------------- 9-2 Symbols in the Illustration ------------------------------------------------------- 9-2 Overview ------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2 Things to do Before Installation -------------------------------------------9-2 Points to note when using Service Mode ------------------------------------ 8-2 Selecting an Installing Location ------------------------------------------------ 9-2 Service Mode Menu --------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2 Points to Note Before Installation -----------------------------------------9-4 Service mode item explanations ----------------------------------------------- 8-3...
  • Page 9 Points to Note at Installation ---------------------------------------------------9-51 Operation Check ------------------------------------------------------------------9-88 Turning Off the Host Machine --------------------------------------------------9-51 Voice Guidance Kit-F2 ----------------------------------------------------- 9-89 Installation Outline Drawing ----------------------------------------------------9-51 Checking the Contents ----------------------------------------------------------9-89 Removing the Color Image Reader Unit ------------------------------------9-51 Points to Note before Installation ---------------------------------------------9-90 Installation Procedure -----------------------------------------------------------9-56 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-90 Auto Adjust Gradation -----------------------------------------------------------9-64...
  • Page 10 Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 --------------------------------------------9-115 User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H Points to Note Before Installation ------------------------------------------- 9-115 (Single Sign-ON H) ------------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 Checking the Contents -------------------------------------------------------- 9-115 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data ----------- 9-171 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-115 Installation Outline Drawing -------------------------------------------- 9-172 Installation Outline Drawing -------------------------------------------------- 9-115 [TYPE-1] --------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-173...
  • Page 11 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing Setting Before Turning OFF the Power ------------------------------------ 9-252 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) ------------------------------------- 9-219 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-252 [TYPE-5] --------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-220 Installation Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------- 9-252 Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption &...
  • Page 12 Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation ---------------------------------------- 9-348 Encryption & Mirroring Kit) ---------------------------------------------------- 9-308 10 Appendix Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) ---------------------------------------------------- 9-308 Service Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-2 Setting the Mirroring ------------------------------------------------------------ 9-309 Special Tools -----------------------------------------------------------------------10-2 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work...

  • Page 13: Safety Precautions

    Safety Precautions ■ Laser Safety ■ Handling of Laser System ■ Turn power switch ON ■ Safety of Toner ■ Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery imageRUNNER ADVANCE ■ Notes Before it Works C5255/5250/5240/5235 Serving ■ Points to Note at Cleaning Series...

  • Page 14: Laser Safety

    Laser Safety Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings, external covers and interlock switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to International Standard IEC60825-1.

  • Page 15: Turn Power Switch

    Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power About Toner switch. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

  • Page 16: Notes When Handling A Lithium Battery

    Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Points to Note at Cleaning CAUTION: CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

  • Page 17: Product Overvew

    Product Overvew ■ Product Lineup ■ Feature ■ Specification ■ Name of Parts ■ Operation Product Overvew...

  • Page 18: Host Machine

    Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Host machine > Model type Product Lineup ■ Host machine configuration Host machine configuration Printer only Host machine T-1-1 ■ Model type C5255 C5250 C5240 C5235 Print Speed (BW / 55 / 51ppm 50 / 45ppm 40 / 35ppm 35 / 30ppm Color)
  • Page 19 Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Pickup delivery / image reading options Option Brand name Remarks and condition Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 ■ Pickup delivery / image reading options Inner Finisher-E1 Built-in finisher Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 1 Path Duplex Type DADF + Reader Reader Heater Kit-J1 【6】...
  • Page 20 Product Overvew > Product Lineup > Option > Function expanding option ■ Function expanding option Brand name Remarks and condition 12 Additional Memory Type D (512MB) 13 Image Data Analyzer Board-B1 14 Super G3 FAX Board-AE2 15 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AE1 1-line FAX board is required 16 Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AE1 1-line FAX board + additional 2nd line FAX Board...

  • Page 21: Feature

    Product Overvew > Feature > Features at servicing > New type connector is adopted Feature Features at servicing ■ Improvement on upgrade operation Product feature It is possible to upgrade options through the host machine. ■ Product feature Same as conventional way, use SST (service support tool) to upgrade. ■...

  • Page 22: Specification

    Product Overvew > Specification > Specification Specification Paper size (upper cassette) B4,A4,A4R,B5,B5R,A5R,LGL,LTRR,LTR,EXEC,Custom size (Min 139.7mm x 182mm to Max 304.8mm x 390mm),K8,K16,K16R Paper size (lower cassette) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 12”-18”(305mm-457mm), 11” x Specification 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (Min 139.7mm x 182mm to Max 304.8mm x 457.2mm), K8, K16, K16R, Envelope (COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-B5, ISO-C5) Host machine installation...

  • Page 23: Weight / Size

    Product Overvew > Specification > Productivity (Print speed) Weight / Size ImageRUNNER ADVANCE Paper C5255 C5250 Width Depth Height WeightApprox. basis Multi- Multi- Product name Size Mode Paper type (mm) (mm) (mm) (Kg) weight(g/ Cassette purpose Cassette purpose iR ADVANCE C5255/C5250 tray tray iR ADVANCE C5240/C5235...

  • Page 24: Paper Type

    Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type Paper type Usable paper types are shown on the next page and later. For irregular-sized paper, refer to the table below. Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) Irregular size 1-1 139.7 to 181.9 99 to 139.6 Irregular size 1-2 182.0 to 390.0...
  • Page 25 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position ■ Pickup position Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper (mm) (mm) purpose Feeding Feeding Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Thin paper(52 to 63g/m2) 420.0...
  • Page 26 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-10 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Recycled paper(64 to 81g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 27 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-11 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Heavy 1(106 to 163g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 28 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-12 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Heavy 2(164 to 220g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 29 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-13 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Heavy 3(221 to 256g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 30 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-14 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Tracing(64 to 81g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 31 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-15 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 1-Side Coated Paper 1(106 to 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 32 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-16 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Labels (151 to 209g/m2) 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 33 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-17 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Pre-Punched paper (75 to 81g/m2) A3 420.0 297.0...
  • Page 34 Product Overvew > Specification > Paper type > Pickup position 1-18 Paper type(g/m Size Feeding Width Pickup position Auto 2-Side Setting Multi- Cassette Cassette direction direction Duplex Cassette Cassette Paper purpose Feeding Feeding (mm) (mm) Deck tray Unit 1 Unit 2 Transparency film (151 to 209g/ 210.0 297.0...

  • Page 35: Name Of Parts

    Product Overvew > Name of Parts > External View 1-19 Name of Parts External View F-1-6 DADF Front Cover Main Power Switch Front Upper Cover Stack Bypass Tray [10] Output Tray Paper Drawer4 [11] Control Panel Paper Drawer3 [12] Rear Cover Paper Drawer2 [13] Rear Rower Cover Paper Drawer1...

  • Page 36: Cross Sectional View

    Product Overvew > Name of Parts > Cross Sectional View 1-20 Cross Sectional View [1] Reversal roller [16] Fixing separration guide [31] Cassette 2 feeding roller [2] 2-side delivery / delivery [17] Pressure roller [32] Cassette 2 separation unit roller [3] Secondary delivery roller [18] Film unit [33] Casset 2 pick-up roller [4] Second delivery entrance...

  • Page 37: Operation

    Product Overvew > Operation > Power Switch > How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note 1-21 Operation ■ How to turn ON / OFF the power and points to note • While progress bar is kept displayed at power-on, HDD access is processing; thus, never Power Switch turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

  • Page 38: Description Of Control Panel

    Product Overvew > Operation > Description of Control Panel > Control Panel 1-22 Description of Control Panel ■ Control Panel iR ADVANCE C5051 / 5045 / 5035 / 5030 Series F-1-9 Control Panel Power Switch ID (authentication) Key USB Insertion Slot [10] Touch Panel Display Settings / Registration Key [11] Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial...

  • Page 39: Technology

    Technology ■ Basic Configuration ■ Controller System ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing System ■ Pickup Feed System ■ External Auxiliary System ■ MEAP ■ Embedded RDS ■ Updater ■ DCM Technology...

  • Page 40: Functional Configuration

    Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence Basic Configuration ■ Basic sequence ● Sequence at Power-On Functional Configuration • Reader Main power switch ON The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image SREADY SSTBY...
  • Page 41 Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence ● Print sequence Period Definition Definition • Reader SREADY An interval in which the shading correction is executed after the Start (Scanner Ready) key is pressed. Start Key ON SSTBY An interval between the completion of the shading correction and SSTBY SREADY...
  • Page 42 Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration > Basic sequence Period Definition Definition SREADY An interval in which the shading correction is executed after the Start key (Scanner Ready) is pressed. SSTBY An interval between the completion of the shading correction and (Scanner Standby) switching the Start key ON / turning the main power OFF.

  • Page 43: Controller System

    Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications / configuration Controller System ■ Specifications / configuration ● PCBs Overview ■ Features Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high functionality. Main Controller PCB 1 Riser PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Image processing sub PCB...
  • Page 44 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications / configuration ● Memory Parts name Function, specifications, features Main controller CPU: 1.2GHz, Control of the entire system Main controller PCB 1 PCB 1 Various controls (memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs (PCI, USB SDRAM (host), RTC Flash PCB...
  • Page 45 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications / configuration Main controller PCB 2 ● I/F, connector Main controller PCB 1 Voice J1002 DDR2 External I/F -SDRAM (M0) Mini-USB Internal I/F DDR2 -SDRAM (M1) DDR2 -SDRAM Flash Riser J1022 USB(H) F-2-10 J1025 CC-VI...
  • Page 46 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications / configuration Main controller PCB 2 ● Function expansion options Main controller PCB1 External I/F Voice Operation/ Internal I/F Voice Guidance PCB Bypass I/F / open I/F J1020 J1010 Image Processing PCB Reader J3003 J1000...
  • Page 47 Technology > Controller System > Overview > HDD Main controller PCB 2 ■ HDD Open I/F PCB The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added. User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9GB. Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
  • Page 48 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence 2-10 ■ Boot sequence Related Error Codes (major error codes): Error Error description [ ]: program storage location Code E602 Error in HDD - Initialization process of hardware 0001 Failure in recognizing HDD - Starting BIOS Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup.
  • Page 49 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence 2-11 ■ Shutdown sequence Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing (to prevent damage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum).

  • Page 50: Controls

    Technology > Controller System > Controls > Flow of Image Data 2-12 Controls ● SEND ■ Flow of Image Data Network ● Copy Reader To DC Controller Image processing writing/reading Reader Resolution conversion, 　 Image rotation, 　 JPEG compression/extension 　 Data conversion 　Tile raster conversion writing/reading...
  • Page 51 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-13 ■ Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password ● Configuration of Security Information The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI. Protection) This machine provides the two types of TPM settings.
  • Page 52 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-14 security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because ● Preparation before Installing TPM the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute “Initialize All Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.
  • Page 53 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-15 ● Works before / after introduction 1. Enable Functionality Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is OFF by default). MEMO: Setup of “System Management PIN” 1.
  • Page 54 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-16 2.TPM Key Backup 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system: confirmation.
  • Page 55 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-17 3. Restore of TPM key CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup. Procedure is about the same as the backup work. If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message Difference between restore work and backup work: and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 56 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-18 4. Disable the feature CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration. To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings]. If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen.
  • Page 57 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-19 • Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) > ● Overview of Actions taken against Troubles [Device Management] > [Certificate Settings] Location TPM Setting = ON TPM Setting = OFF...
  • Page 58 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection) 2-20 ● Related Error Code ● Security Information Storage Location Error Storage Backup Error description, Assumed cause, remedy Data Type Function Name of Data Code Location Availability E746 Error in encryption...
  • Page 59 Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option) 2-21 ■ High capacity HDD (Option) Storage Backup Data Type Function Name of Data Location Availability The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch / 1TB SRAM Password/ Network...
  • Page 60 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-22 ■ HDD mirroring feature (option) ● Works before using this functionality (installation) ● Overview HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB mirroring PCB for HDD1 This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).
  • Page 61 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-23 ● List of operation status (LED) MEMO: HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB. • This machine can be used even during “rebuild” process (operation is performed with HDD1) The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates •...
  • Page 62 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-24 ● Description of Modes Mode Flow at Start-up The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes. Turn ON Main Power Switch The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses. The status flows among the modes below during operation.
  • Page 63 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option) 2-25 Mode Flow during Operation ● Overview of Trouble Recovery When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to each mode. Mirror Mode The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
  • Page 64 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option) 2-26 ● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality ■ Removable HDD (option) 1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery. This option enables easier HDD mounting (slot-out/ in) at power-OFF (see *1). In addition, the The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process.
  • Page 65 HDD encryption and mirroring functionality It is not possible to decode. with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two Encryption functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
  • Page 66 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-28 ● Actions against Troubles – Overview <Points to Note in Initialization using USB> The screen below is shown on the control panel when E602-2000 occurred and the machine Servicing User data Recovery...
  • Page 67 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional) 2-29 ● Relevant Error Codes E610 and detailed codes E602 and detailed codes Detailed E code Cause (Detected Error) Actions Code Detection E code Description Cause Actions E610 Failure in the HDD encryption key Timing 0001...

  • Page 68: Service Operations

    Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing 2-30 Service Operations ■ When Replacing Parts Parts name Remedy Reference Backup of the set/registered data see Chapter 5, "HDD." HDD format Downloading system software Restoring the backup data Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)”...

  • Page 69: Laser Exposure System

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview 2-31 Laser Exposure System Laser Scanner Unit 1 Laser Scanner Unit 2 Overview Imaging Lens ■ Overview Reflection Mirror To realize the high-speed printing, this machine adopts the 2 Laser Scanner Units and the Laser Driver of each color executes laser scanning with 4-beam.
  • Page 70 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Specification 2-32 ■ Specification Item Description Wavelength 775 to 800nm Laser type Red color laser (non-visible light) Laser output 10mW Number of laser scanner unit Number of laser light imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255 / C5240: 4 beam for each color imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5240 / C5235: 2 beam for each color Resolution 1200dpi...

  • Page 71: Various Controls

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Overview 2-33 Various Controls DC Controller (UN1) Laser Driver PCB ■ Overview Laser ON/OFF control Item Operation description Laser Driver PCB Laser ON / OFF control Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of laser control signal Horizontal scanning Scanner Motor...
  • Page 72 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Horizontal scanning synchronous control 2-34 ■ Laser ON / OFF control ■ Horizontal scanning synchronous control ● Purpose ● Purpose Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of laser control signals. This is to align the writing start position in horizontal scanning direction.
  • Page 73 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control 2-35 ■ Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control Laser Scanner Unit 1 Y Laser ● Purpose Y Laser Driver VDO_Y BD_YM This is to align the writing start position in vertical scanning direction. BD Sensor (Y, M) ●...
  • Page 74 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > APC (Auto Power Control) control 2-36 ■ APC (Auto Power Control) control Print instruction ● Purpose Reference signal This is to make the laser light for 1 line consistent amount. Video request signal ●...
  • Page 75 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser scanner motor control 2-37 ■ Laser scanner motor control Laser Scanner Unit 1 ● Purpose Y Laser Y laser control signal This is to rotate the scanner mirror by the specified speed. Y Laser Driver ●...
  • Page 76 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser scanner motor control 2-38 Laser Scanner Unit 1 Related error code ACC1 E100-0100: BD error (laser scanner unit 1) Scanner Motor (Y, M) When the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM laser) is started or print operation is processing, if the BD DEC1 signal cannot be detected after the specified time.
  • Page 77 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > BD correction control 2-39 ■ BD correction control START ● Purpose This is to correct the displacement of writing start position of each color laser due to the angle Scanner motor control finish variation of scanner mirror facet.
  • Page 78 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Laser shutter control 2-40 ■ Laser shutter control Bk Laser Shutter Color Laser Shutter ● Purpose Bk Shutter Lever This is to prevent the residue toner from sticking to the dust-prevention glass. Or to prevent the laser light from emitting to the machine inside when the front cover / right cover is opened.
  • Page 79 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Image tilt correction control 2-41 ■ Image tilt correction control Laser shutter position Relation of shutter lever and cam Sensor lever position For Bk For color For Bk For color ● Purpose This is to prevent the gap of laser emission.
  • Page 80 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Image tilt correction control 2-42 Photosensitive Drum Imaging Lens Skew Correction Motor Position relation of imaging lens and arm Skew Correction Motor Imaging Lens Imaging Lens Before correction Imaging Lens Photosensitive Drum Skew Correction Motor...

  • Page 81: Service Works

    Technology > Laser Exposure System > Service Works > Points to note at servicing 2-43 Service Works ■ Periodically replaced parts There is no periodically replaced part. ■ Consumables Parts Name Parts Number Estimated Life Dust-blocking Glass cleaning pad FL2-9476 150k T-2-25 ■...

  • Page 82: Image Formation System

    Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications 2-44 Image Formation System ■ Specifications Item Function/Method Photosensitive Material Overview Drum O/D of drum 30mm Cleaning Cleaning blade ■ Overview Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051=246mm/s, imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045=246mm/s, Image formation system of this machine uses the magnetic 2-component jumping developing imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030=160mm/s method for developing and the intermediate transfer method for transfer to create toner Drum heater...
  • Page 83 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print process 2-45 ■ Parts configuration ■ Print process ● Major Parts Delivery Fixing block Toner container 8. Fixing ITB cleaning block Transfer block Transfer 9. ITB cleaning assembly 7. Separation 6. Secondary transfer Toner supply 5.
  • Page 84 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print process 2-46 ● Bias Types There are the following 8 types biases used on this machine. Bias value Bias name Bias type Application destination (Reference value) Primary charging bias (DC) Approx. –600V Primary Charging Roller Primary charging bias (AC) Approx.

  • Page 85: Controls

    Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Pre-exposure 2-47 Controls ■ Pre-exposure ● Pre-exposure control ■ Overview Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the primary Pre-exposure Image stabilization control charging prevents drum ghost during continuous print. Pre-exposure control Drum film thickness detection According to the command from the DC controller PCB, the pre-exposure unit exposes (emits)
  • Page 86 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary charging 2-48 ■ Primary charging ● Primary charging bias control To charge the surface of photosensitive drum to be uniform negatively-charged potential ● Overview The primary charging bias (AC+DC negative), generated by HVT1/2 PCB, is applied to the This machine uses the roller charging method for primary transfer.
  • Page 87 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary charging 2-49 Execution time ● Primary charging cleaning control Approx. 4 seconds This machine may not be able to collect residual toner on the drum because this machine uses fine-grain toner, which possibly results in image fault (image soiling) due to residual Operation of the main unit toner attached on the primary charging roller.
  • Page 88 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-50 ■ Developing/drum ● Developing bias control To create toner image on the photosensitive drum after the toner has been attached on the ● Developing overview photosensitive drum Toner-blocking Control description Developing electrode plate cylinder...
  • Page 89 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-51 ● ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control ● Toner-blocking bias control This machine introduced a method to supply developer (toner + carrier) to improve life (longer This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cylinder due to deterioration of the life) of the developing assembly.
  • Page 90 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-52 ● Drum overview ● Drive configuration Pre-exposure LED light guide Drum motor Photosensitive drum M1 M4 Drum encoder sensor 1 Drum encoder sensor 2 (UN31 / 33 / 35 / 37) Pre-exposure LED (UN32 / 34 / 36 / 38) light guide...
  • Page 91 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-53 ● Detection of drum (presence) ● Old/new detection of drum unit To detect if the drum unit is installed or not To detect whether the drum unit is new or old Execution timing Detection timing 1) When the power is turned ON...
  • Page 92 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-54 ● Drum life detection MEMO: To detect life of the Photosensitive Drum. Fuse cut operation is executed when the power is turned ON after a new Drum Unit is installed. The life data is stored in the SRAM (IC2) of the DC Controller.
  • Page 93 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing/drum 2-55 ● Drum heater control ● Drum rotation speed control The drum heater is attached below the photosensitive drum to keep stabilized charging and This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy exposure according to the environmental change in the machine.
  • Page 94 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation 2-56 ■ Transfer/separation ● Drive configuration ● Overview ITB motor ITB displacement control motor ITB steering Post-secondary transfer Drive roller position sensor(PS24) static eliminator (steering roller) ITB displacement ITB scraper sensor 1 to 5 (PS25 28,PS58) ITB Cleaning Primary transfer...
  • Page 95 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation 2-57 ● Primary transfer disengagement control The primary transfer roller for color is engaged or disengaged to keep longer life of the image formation parts (photosensitive drum, ITB) Primary transfer Execution timing auxiliary roller •...
  • Page 96 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation 2-58 ● Primary transfer bias control ● Secondary transfer bias control This control transfers toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB. This control transfers toner on the ITB to the paper. The primary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVT2 (UN17), is applied to the The secondary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVY3 (UN18), is applied to primary transfer roller.
  • Page 97 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation 2-59 ● ITB displacement correction control Related Error Codes This control prevents damage on the ITB due to displacement of the ITB. E075-0002: failure in ITB steering position sensor E075-0003: failure in ITB displacement control (full displacement to the rear) Execution timing E075-0004: failure in ITB displacement sensor When the ITB is rotated...
  • Page 98 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer/separation 2-60 ● ITB cleaning control ● Secondary transfer outer roller cleaning control To remove residual toner on the ITB To prevent soil on the back of the sheet caused by soil on the secondary transfer outer roller Control description Execution timing 1) The ITB cleaning blade scrapes toner on the ITB.
  • Page 99 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum cleaning 2-61 ● Separation ■ Drum cleaning Paper is separated from the ITB due to paper’s elastic force. ● Overview In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the static eliminator reduces potential on To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum the back surface of paper.
  • Page 100 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-62 ■ Image stabilization control ● Overview To prevent image fault due to environmental change or deterioration of photosensitive drum to make stable print image DC controller(UN1) Main controller 2 ATVC control ATR control PASCAL control...
  • Page 101 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-63 Control types Execution Execution condition Required time (sec) timing At power-on At normal condition Model A: approx 20.9 Model B: approx 29.5 H/H environment Model A: approx 46.0 Model B: approx 68.1 At recovery 8 or more hours in sleep mode Model A: approx 20.9 Model B: approx 29.5...
  • Page 102 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-64 ● Drum film thickness detection To detect use condition of the photosensitive drum Execution timing 1) At power-on 2) At recovery from sleep mode 3) At last rotation on a specified print basis Control description 1) The drum count value is calculated by the monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias.
  • Page 103 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-65 ● D-max control Start This control determines optimal developing DC bias, primary charging DC bias, laser power output. DC controller(UN1) Execution timing Patch pattern is created 1) When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly. 2) At every post-rotation after the total reaches 1000 prints.
  • Page 104 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-66 ● PASCAL control MEMO: This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics of the image This control creates 4 types of patch patterns as follows: This control is executed when selecting [“Auto gradation correction” > “Full correction”] in •...
  • Page 105 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-67 ● D-half control Start This control determines optimal image gradation Main controller2 Execution timing Output of patch pattern data 1) At replacement of the Drum Unit and Developing Assembly 2) At last rotation on a specified print basis DC controller(UN1) 3) At power-on (H/H environment)
  • Page 106 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-68 4) The Main Controller 2 executes the gradation correction to realize the ideal halftone image Start based on this data. Also, this control creates the standard patch used at ARCDAT control and stores the Main controller2 standard data for ARCDAT according to the measurement result of UN49.
  • Page 107 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-69 Correction value calculation flow for ARCDAT control ● ARCDAT control This control obtains ideal gradation characteristics while reducing down time Start Execution timing DC controller(UN1) 1) When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly Reference patch pattern for 2) At post-rotation every time the total reaches 25 prints (when continuously making prints, ARCDAT is created(3Patch)
  • Page 108 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-70 Start DC controller(UN1) Patch pattern formation Patch sensor(center)(UN49) Patch scanning DC controller(UN1) Measurement data (SIN) transmission Patch sensor Main controller2 (center) (UN49) Comparison of measurement data (SIN) and reference data (INT) α...
  • Page 109 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-71 ● Color displacement correction control Control detail 1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color on the ITB. This control corrects uneven exposure of the laser scanner unit or color displacement caused 2) DC Controller compares those patterns with the standard value backed up in the DC by uneven rotation of the drum or ITB Controller by reading the patch sensor (front, center, rear) (UN47 to 49) and detects the...
  • Page 110 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-72 ● ATR control Related Error Codes This control supplies developer to the developing assembly to keep ideal ratio of developer in E020-001x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (more than the upper the developing assembly limit) E020-002x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (less than the lower...
  • Page 111 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image stabilization control 2-73 ● ATVC control Secondary transfer ATVC Execution timing This control prevents transfer failure due to environmental change or deterioration of the At every print job primary transfer roller or the secondary transfer roller Control description Primary transfer ATVC 1) Monitoring current value of the secondary transfer DC bias is detected...
  • Page 112 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner supply assembly 2-74 ■ Toner supply assembly ● Toner cap automatic opening control This control automatically opens/closes the cap of toner container ● Overview Toner container driver motor To supply toner in the toner container to the developing assembly M9~M12 Cap release Cap drive...
  • Page 113 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner supply assembly 2-75 ● Toner supply control/toner level detection Related Error Codes Supplies the toner in the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly. At the same time, it E025-0100: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (Y) detects the toner level inside the Hopper Unit.
  • Page 114 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner supply assembly 2-76 • Toner level detection Related Error Codes Display Empty toner E025-0100: Error in toner container drive motor (Y) Detection description Prior delivery alarm Empty toner warning E025-0200: Error in toner container drive motor (M) The residual quantity Toner container : Toner container : 0%...
  • Page 115 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste toner feeding assembly 2-77 ■ Waste toner feeding assembly ● Waste toner case full level detection To detect toner level accumulated in the waste toner case ● Overview ITB cleaner To feed waste toner of the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit to the waste toner unit ITB unit case...
  • Page 116 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste toner feeding assembly 2-78 Related Error Code In order to prevent the toner leakage at removal of Waste Toner Case, the Shutter is E013-0001: error in lock of waste toner feeding path prepared.
  • Page 117 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Other controls 2-79 ■ Other controls Sequence for color band ● Special control Making prints with low image ratio can deteriorate toner and reduces developing performance. Following sequences are assigned as special sequence with this machine To prevent this symptom, average image ratio for each color is calculated by ATR control and appropriate amount of toner (width = A4, length = solid color band appropriate for deteriorated ITB cleaning blade...

  • Page 118: Service Work

    Technology > Image Formation System > Service work > Points to note at servicing 2-80 Service work However, there is no compatibility between the ITB Unit of this machine and that of iR-ADV C5051 series. Therefore, it is not interchangeable. ■...

  • Page 119: Fixing System

    Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Features 2-81 Fixing System 1. Saving energy Fast warm-up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity. Overview 2. High speed B&W 55ppm/ color 51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of ■...
  • Page 120 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration 2-82 ■ Specifications ■ Major parts configuration Item Function/method Fixing method On-demand fixing Pressure roller Fixing speed 55 / 50ppm 246 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper) machine 123 mm/s (1/2-speed, thick paper) 82 mm/s (1/3-speed, coated paper, transparency) 40 / 35ppm 160 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper)
  • Page 121 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration 2-83 Shutter Fixing cooling fan (front) (FM5) Fixing shutter motor Fixing shutter position sensor (PS32) Fixing shutter HP sensor (PS31) Fixing cooling fan (rear) (FM6) F-2-116 Parts name Function / method Film unit Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed (fused).

  • Page 122: Controls

    Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Standby temperature control 2-84 Controls ■ Standby temperature control ■ Fixing temperature control: overview Fixing temperature STBY INTR PRNT Fixing temperature STBY INTR PRNT Flaying start control Flying start Startup During-print Sheet-t temperature control (warm-up control...
  • Page 123 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control 2-85 ■ Print temperature control Related Service Mode (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX> FLYING Fixing (To enable/disable Flying start (pre-mature start) temperature <Setting value> STBY INTR PRNT 0: Enable Flying start [default] 1: Disable Flying start Startup During print...
  • Page 124 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control 2-86 • Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control Target temperature during printing If the distance between sheets is longer than usual , temperature between sheets is Target Paper type reduced to prevent temperature rise. Model Speed temperature...
  • Page 125 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control 2-87 ■ Down sequence control Related Service Mode • Display of thermistor detection temperature • Down sequence when feeding small size paper (Lv.1) COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG Purpose: > FIX-C (detected temperature of main thermistor 2) To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print >...
  • Page 126 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control 2-88 Starting conditions: Related Service Mode If the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 exceeds the specified temperature • Setting for down sequence start temperature when feeding small size paper (250~260 deg C) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the (Lv.1) COPIER >...
  • Page 127 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Detection of fixing assembly 2-89 ■ Fixing film edge cooling control ■ Detection of fixing assembly Temperature at the edge of the film is increased when continuously making prints. Excessive The thermistor connection signal, which is input to the DC controller, detects presence of temperature rise can deteriorate the film.
  • Page 128 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection features 2-90 ■ Film unit engagement / disengagement control ■ Protection features Error To prevent deformation of the fixing film / pressure roller caused by heat and pressure when Code Description Clear the drive of pressure roller is stopped, and also to improve jam recovering performance, the E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature film unit is disengaged from the pressure roller under the following conditions:...

  • Page 129: Service Work

    Technology > Fixing System > Service work > When replacing parts 2-91 Service work ■ List of periodical service works Parts Estimated ■ Periodically replaced parts Parts name Remarks number life (print) 1 Fixing Separation Cuide FC8-4906 300,000 Replace the Film Unit at the same time No parts are assigned to be replaced periodically.
  • Page 130 Technology > Fixing System > Service work > When replacing parts 2-92 Specified value (range): Center: 9.0 -/+ 1.0mm Edge (145mm from the center of feeding paper): 9.0 -/+ 1.0mm Edge 145 mm Center Feeding direction 145 mm Edge F-2-124 If measured value is out of the specified range, reinstall the replaced parts (film unit or pressure roller) and then measure the nip width again.

  • Page 131: Pickup Feed System

    Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Specification 2-93 Pickup Feed System ■ Specification Item Description Paper storage method Front loading method Overview Pickup method Cassette 1, 2 Separation retard method Multi-purpose tray Simple retard method ■ Features Paper stack capacity Cassette 1, 2 550 sheets (80g / m paper), 650 sheets (64g / m paper)
  • Page 132 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-94 ■ Parts Configuration Reverse Roller [13] Cassette 1 Separation Roller Second Delivery Roller [14] Cassette 1 Feed Roller ● Roller Layout Drawing Third Delivery Roller [15] Cassette 1 Pickup Roller Duplex Inlet Roller [16] Vertical Path Roller 1...
  • Page 133 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration 2-95 ● Sensor / Switch Layout Drawing PS33 Registration sensor PS50 Cassette 2 Paper Presence Sensor PS34 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS51 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A [PS39] PS35 Fixing Loop Sensor 1 PS52 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B PS36 Fixing Loop Sensor 2 PS53 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A...
  • Page 134 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Paper Path 2-96 ● Load Driving Drawing ■ Paper Path Reverse mouth Third delivery Second delivery First delivery Meandering is reduced Multi-purpose tray pickup Side deck Cassette 1 pickup pickup Cassette 2 pickup Option Cassette pickup...
  • Page 135 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Interval Speed Up 2-97 ■ Interval Speed Up Reverse sensor [PS39] 246mm/sec (C5051,C5045) 400mm/sec (C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec (C5051,C5045) 340mm/sec (C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec Delivery speed up position Inner delivery sensor [PS37] Duplex paper sensor [PS38] Duplex re-pickup position Registration position Pre-registration sensor [PS33]...

  • Page 136: Various Controls

    Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-98 Various Controls ■ Cassette Pickup Assembly ● Overview ■ Overview Parts Configuration Cassette 1 Pre-registration sensor Duplex / Delivery Cassette 2 Assembly Cassette 1 Pre-registration sensor paper presence sensor Cassette 1...
  • Page 137 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-99 ● Drive Configuration ● Detection Paper Level / Presence Detection Vertical path Roller1 Pickup Roller1 There are 3 sensors to detect the paper level and paper presence in the cassette. Feed Roller1 Paper level is displayed on the operation panel.
  • Page 138 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-100 Sensor Sensor Paper Presence Cassette size Display Remaining Level Sensor switch A 100% to approx. 50% of capacity Rear detection Approx. 50% of capacity to rink approx. 50 sheets Rear guide plate Approx.
  • Page 139 Tub paper Overall Pre-punched paper Overall Especially thin paper, 52 gsm OK Prince Joshitsu etc. Canon Europe Canon Recycled 80 Overall (Vision Classic White) Canon Europe Canon High Grade Especially heavy paper 220/250 (Mondi Business Paper) gsm etc. Canon Digital Office Colour...
  • Page 140 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly 2-102 ● Method of Setting Special Paper ● Pre-Registration Control • Service mode To correct the feed variation at pickup and to perform the stabilized paper feed, pre- COPIER >...
  • Page 141 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly 2-103 ■ Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly Drive Configuration ● Overview Parts Configuration Multi-purpose tray Multi-purpose tray Multi-purpose tray size sensor (UN52) pickup clutch (CL1) Multi-purpose tray motor (M18) Multi-purpose tray motor Multi-purpose tray...
  • Page 142 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Fixing / Registration Assembly 2-104 ■ Fixing / Registration Assembly ● Registration Control OHP Detection ● Overview Transparency detection is performed as a measure for the case where paper other than Parts / Drive Configuration transparency is fed with transparency mode.
  • Page 143 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Duplex / Delivery Assembly 2-105 ■ Duplex / Delivery Assembly ● Overview Big arch detection Parts / Drive Configuration Reverse roller Second delivery roller Third delivery roller Fixing inlet sensor On Fixing arch sensor 2 Fixing motor feed speed up Duplex inlet roller...
  • Page 144 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > Duplex / Delivery Assembly 2-106 ● Duplex Control Duplex Wait Control To realize 5-sheet circulation, there are 2 duplex wait positions. Following is the duplex wait Duplex Feed Control position for small paper. On this machine, the paper is revered outside the machine with using the reverse mouth.
  • Page 145 Technology > Pickup Feed System > Various Controls > JAM Detection 2-107 ■ JAM Detection At the cassette pickup assembly, since the feed speed is increased, detection cannot catch up with it. Thus, delay and stationary jam detection are not executed at the Cassette 1 Pre- Registration Sensor.

  • Page 146: Service Works

    Technology > Pickup Feed System > Service Works > When Replacing Parts 2-108 Service Works ■ Periodically replacement parts N / A ■ Consumables Parts Number of used Replacement Parts Name Remarks Number part timing Cassette Feed Roller FC6-7083 150K Cassette Detachment Roller FC6-6661 150K...

  • Page 147: External Auxiliary System

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter Control 2-109 External Auxiliary System Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item Country Target Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter code Controls Total 2 Total Copy Copy Print Print model (Black...
  • Page 148 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter Control 2-110 <Code description> Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item Country • Large : Large size paper (if the width in paper feed direction is over 364mm/count up x1) Target Counter Counter...
  • Page 149 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan 2-111 ■ Fan Name Function Error code Fixing Exhaust Fan 1 Heat exhaustion around Fixing Assembly E805-0000 ● Overview Fixing Exhaust Fan 2 Heat exhaustion around Fixing Assembly E805-0001 Fan Layout Power Cooling Fan Cooling down of Power Supply Assembly E804...
  • Page 150 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan 2-112 Air Flow Air flow of fixing system Air flow around the Main Controller and the Power Supply F-2-146 F-2-145 2-112 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan...
  • Page 151 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan 2-113 Air flow around the operation system 2-speed control Among the fans installed in this machine, the Power Cooling Fan (FM3) and the Delivery Fan 1 (FM7) perform the 2-speed control. Rotation speed is switched when the Voltage switching PCB of Fan switches the voltage.
  • Page 152 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power Supply Control 2-114 ■ Power Supply Control ● Power supply inside the printer By turning ON the Main Switch, a signal is output from the Main Controller PCB 1 so that power supply starts.
  • Page 153 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power Supply Control 2-115 ● Power supply of Reader Unit ● Power connection with each option Reader / ADFUnit Motor Sensor Staple Finisher・C1 LED Lamp CMOS PCB Reader Unit Printer Controller （Reader） 4.5V CMOS PCB LED Lamp...
  • Page 154 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power Supply Control 2-116 ● Power save function Sleep 1 (DC Controller PCB, Reader Controller PCB: OFF) Power is not supplied to the DC Controller PCB and the Reader Controller PCB. (Power is Standby supplied to the Main Controller PCB 1 and 2.) When the value of service mode >...
  • Page 155 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power Supply Control 2-117 Conditions not to move to Deep Sleep When the following conditions are met, the machine does not move to Deep Sleep. System Performance Status The sleep mode exit timer is running (for 15 seconds after exiting Deep Sleep). The hard disk drive protection timer is running (for 10 minutes after exiting from Deep Sleep Settings in Settings/Registration and the hard disk drive is powered ON.
  • Page 156 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup 2-118 Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub ■ Quick Startup To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer the All-night Power Supply PCB.
  • Page 157 Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup 2-119 possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts up normally (even quick startup is ON).

  • Page 158: Service Operations

    Technology > External Auxiliary System > Service Operations > Points to note at servicing 2-120 Service Operations ■ When Replacing Parts ■ Consumables Parts Name Parts number Execution timing Remark 100k(B / W) Toner filter FC6-9817 25k(CL) T-2-76 ■ When Replacing Parts When replacing the Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter (COPIER >...

  • Page 159: Meap

    Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication) 2-121 MEAP An example of the LDAP server management screen Changes ■ LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication) LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single Sign- On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).

  • Page 160: Preparation For Using Sso-H

    * 64-bit version is not supported. 2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server) • The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory. F-2-159 • The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low line), and % (percent).
  • Page 161 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users 2-123 ■ PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users Note: As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC logon name (pre-Windows 2000)"...

  • Page 162: Preparation For Using Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS 2-124 Preparation for Using SMS Note: • The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer. To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings •...
  • Page 163 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-125 ■ Settings on the Device Side Note: When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management ● Network configuration process Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button. In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings (This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI.
  • Page 164 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-126 ● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL 2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key and Certificate Settings ].
  • Page 165 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-127 5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button. 6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ]. F-2-169 Default Key Settings 1) Click [ Preferences ] >...
  • Page 166 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-128 2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button. Installing a server certificate (reference information) When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key for SSL, "Certificate Error"...
  • Page 167 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-129 3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab. 5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and then click the [ Browse ] button.
  • Page 168 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-130 7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification 9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing Authorities"...
  • Page 169 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side 2-131 ● Network Port Settings 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443.

  • Page 170: Login To Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline 2-132 Login to SMS ■ How to Check the Serial Number When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some ■ Outline cases. SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication).
  • Page 171 Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline 2-133 ● When SMS Cannot Be Accessed If login is not possible due to exclusive control Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization) logged into the SMS of the same iR device.

  • Page 172: Installing An Meap Application

    Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline 2-134 Installing an MEAP Application If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS ■ Outline (https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/).
  • Page 173 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-135 ■ Procedure to install applications CAUTION: 1) Long on to SMS. • You cannot install only the license. 2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu. •...
  • Page 174 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications 2-136 5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button. Note: There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.
  • Page 175 To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ F-2-203 2-137...

  • Page 176: Meap Specifications

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-138 MEAP Specifications Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP ■...
  • Page 177 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? 2-139 Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks Description iR-ADV C2030 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.10.xx or later Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible iR-ADV C2025 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,...

  • Page 178: Meap Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-140 MEAP Application Management Description 72 Reserved ■ Outline IMI: API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original image SSL: Support for addition of the CN validation function You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks...
  • Page 179 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application 2-141 4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [ 5) Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application Stopped ].
  • Page 180 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-142 1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu. ■ Managing the License File 2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has ●...
  • Page 181 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-143 ● Procedure adding a license file 4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install. 1) Log on to SMS. 2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.
  • Page 182 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-144 ● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable. CAUTION: • Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
  • Page 183 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-145 4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button. ● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file Note: The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device (with the same device serial number).
  • Page 184 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File 2-146 5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button. 7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button. F-2-223 F-2-222 6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by 8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
  • Page 185 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-147 ■ Other License File Management Functions 2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense). ●...
  • Page 186 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions 2-148 5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ]. 8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ]. F-2-232 F-2-229 9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation...

  • Page 187: Enhanced System Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-149 Enhanced System Application Management ■ About Login Service The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is ■ Outline booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System [ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging Management ] page.
  • Page 188 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-150 Differences from conventional SSO ● Environment confirmation Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements Domain B Domain C Domain B Domain C needed in each login service.
  • Page 189 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-151 ● Setting the Authentication Method ● Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods. Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
  • Page 190 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview 2-152 2) Restart the device. 5) Restart the device. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. 3) Disable Depart ID Management.
  • Page 191 Not Available Available User Attribute: memberOf Not Available Available Character String: Canon Peripheral Admins Available Available The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI > Single T-2-88 Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet) F-2-242...
  • Page 192 SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter “SA”) to stand-alone basis. authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers (users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this iR device function.
  • Page 193 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-155 ■ Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) CAUTION: ● Outline Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H.
  • Page 194 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) 2-156 Settings for access mode in sites Note: Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as • The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net. detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
  • Page 195 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) 2-157 1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. ■ Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H.
  • Page 196 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services 2-158 ■ Server authentication and local device authentication 2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click [SWITCH] button for the login service to be used. It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication"...
  • Page 197 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure 2-159 ■ Login Service Installation Procedure CAUTION: Follow the procedure show below to install login services. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS 1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] >...
  • Page 198 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure 2-160 3) Click [ Install] button. ■ Login Service Uninstallation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services. In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status). Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.

  • Page 199: System Application Management

    Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication 2-161 System Application Management Note: If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS. of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
  • Page 200 RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name • In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
  • Page 201 Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication 2-163 Note: CAUTION: • SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login gain access to SMS.

  • Page 202: Setting The Method To Login To Sms

    Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-164 Setting the method to login to SMS ● Setting for login by Password Authentication The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows. ■...
  • Page 203 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-165 4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password ● Setting for login by RLS Authentication Authentication) to check if the status is changed. The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
  • Page 204 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline 2-166 4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote CAUTION: Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed. In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method.

  • Page 205: Meap Application System Information

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information 2-167 MEAP Application System Information ■ Initial Display Languages of SMS SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the ■ Outline drop down list on a login page.
  • Page 206 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application 2-168 ■ Display of System Information Details ■ Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.

  • Page 207: Meap Application Information

    The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen. Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Application Information Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed • Application Name • Version Maximum Memory Usage : 1024 •...

  • Page 208: Check License

    Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File 2-170 Check License 3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the information of the target application. ■ Outline You can check the contents of the license file. ■...

  • Page 209: Changing Sms Login Password

    Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline 2-171 Changing SMS Login Password MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management ■ Outline ■ Outline You can change the password for logging into SMS. If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"...
  • Page 210 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management 2-172 ■ Advantages Obtained When Using the Services ■ MEAP Application Setting Information Management By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively Application Setting Information Management can be deleted.

  • Page 211: Maintenance

    Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST 2-173 ■ MEAP Application Log Management 4) To download the logs The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file. The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted.
  • Page 212 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST 2-174 The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup ● Backup Item Automatically Copied function of SST (Service Support Tool).
  • Page 213 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-175 ● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices ■ Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application.
  • Page 214 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2-176 4) Connecting the device using SST 6) Saving backup data When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button. Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK] to save the backup data on the PC.
  • Page 215 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data 2-177 ■ Procedures to Restore Backup Data CAUTION: 1) Connecting to the device Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up using SST to recovery of the data.

  • Page 216: Formatting And Replacing The Hdd

    MEAP application installed. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question.
  • Page 217 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline 2-179 ● HDD replacement procedure ● If the MEAP application area can be backed up Outline If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD, The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
  • Page 218 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-180 ■ MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click [MEAPSAFE] button. ● Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
  • Page 219 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 2-181 ● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode Note: 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2. If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title bar of the browser.
  • Page 220 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-182 4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK] ■ Collection of MEAP Console Logs button.
  • Page 221 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-183 3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button. PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used) 1) Install the terminal software on the PC. 2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button. F-2-316 4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value F-2-319...
  • Page 222 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-184 4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the 6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save "OK"...
  • Page 223 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-185 9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly. Note: While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu. Comment to Log...
  • Page 224 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs 2-186 PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen. 1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
  • Page 225 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices 2-187 8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. ■ Using USB Devices ● USB Driver Two types of USB drivers While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as “MEAP driver”), not only MEAP driver but also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as “system driver”) can be used in iR-ADV series.
  • Page 226 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices 2-188 Operating mode Software keyboard Conventional USB System driver Note: settings [Use MEAP application You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP driver as USB input...
  • Page 227 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices 2-189 Specifications for the use of USB keyboards ● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
  • Page 228 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices 2-190 4) Press [OK] button to restart this device. 3) Press button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT] button. F-2-345 4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field. F-2-343 ●...
  • Page 229 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices 2-191 Example of output result C : Configure The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is ******************************** active. *** USB Device report print *** ******************************** I : Interface...
  • Page 230 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function 2-192 The content of MEAP preferred device information ■ Integrated Authentication Function Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with ● Sharing the Authentication Information MEAP application.
  • Page 231 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function 2-193 ● Comparison of Functions Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button. Volatile Credential Persistent Credential Registered Character strings and arbitrary Character strings only User ID/Password/ information Java objects Domain/Arbitrary character strings...
  • Page 232 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting 2-194 ■ Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours" A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay Main Power] Setting execution".
  • Page 233 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-195 ■ Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Note : Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H Unable to Be Logged in do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
  • Page 234 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-196 • Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch. Procedure Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function", 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
  • Page 235 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in 2-197 4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. SSO-H user registration information edition screen: Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] (SSO management screen [Main Menu] >...

  • Page 236: Reference Material

    (Esplet Type not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined Application) word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let] derived from Applet/Service. File Description An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a program.
  • Page 237 Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary 2-199 Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations J2ME Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that (Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc.

  • Page 238: Option For Exclusive Individual Measure

    Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2) 2-200 Option for exclusive individual measure Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations The kit containing information and tools required for software development. ■ Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2) (Software Development Kit) Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
  • Page 239 Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) 2-201 4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is ■...
  • Page 240 Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) 2-202 3) Press [ANIM-SW] button. F-2-370 4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

  • Page 241: Embedded Rds

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions 2-203 Embedded RDS ■ Features and benefits E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.

  • Page 242: Limitations

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function 2-204 Limitations Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG ■ Service Mode Menu Transmission Function HV-STS Error codes for transmission: E000 - E00F, // Fixing 1) At the time of transmission when an alarm/ service call error is detected, even if the alarm DPOT...

  • Page 243: Service Cautions

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions 2-205 Service cautions NOTE: *The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result. 1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.

  • Page 244: E-Rds Setup

    Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance 2-206 E-RDS Setup (3) Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this ■ Confirmation and preparation in advance machine network related settings. See Users’...
  • Page 245 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-207 ■ Steps to E-RDS settings (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button. NOTE: This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
  • Page 246 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings 2-208 4. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. CAUTION: 5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS]. The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
  • Page 247 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-209 If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the ■ Steps to Service Call button settings "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed. ●...
  • Page 248 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-210 ● Steps for settings of service call completion NOTE: When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter described below to execute the service call completion work.
  • Page 249 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-211 ● Steps for service call request 4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button. Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call. NOTE: E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to 1.
  • Page 250 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings 2-212 ● Steps for service call cancellation 4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed. To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below. 1.
  • Page 251 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings 2-213 ■ Steps to Service Browser settings 3. Reboot this machine. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS]. 2.

  • Page 252: Faq

    Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-214 ■ Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the No.1 default value. Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail? A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!"...
  • Page 253 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ 2-215 No.5 No.10 Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic"...

  • Page 254: Error Code And Strings

    Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-216 Error code and strings No.14 Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/ The following error information is output in the communication error log details display screen. Registration >...
  • Page 255 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-217 Code Error strings Cause Remedy Code Error strings Cause Remedy 8xxx 0004 Operation is not Method which E-RDS is not Contact help desk 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not Communication attempted Check the network supported supporting attempted.
  • Page 256 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings 2-218 Code Error strings Cause Remedy 29 8xxx 2046 Server certificate • The route certificate Check that the device time and expired registered with the device date are correctly set. has expired. If the device time and date are •...

  • Page 257: Updater

    Firmware Upload Updater Firmware • MEAP Application/System Option Installation Canon Inc. By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,...
  • Page 258 CDS instead of distribution using a master CD. In the field, these firmware can be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser. 1) Manually execute Updater. Firmware Upload Updater Firmware Canon Inc. Updater function available machine imageRUNNER ADVANCE Service 2) Firmware distribution 1) Firmware Update...

  • Page 259: Installing Meap Application/System Option

    CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application Upload 1) Enter LAN or a system option. Application Installing MEAP Application Canon Inc. 4) Transmit LF imageRUNNER ADVANCE Sales Company LAN: License Access Number...
  • Page 260 Firmware Cancelling downloaded firmware Acquiring firmware distribution Service Command for Firmware Distribution information registered from Technician Canon Inc. Notifying firmware version F-2-403 information Local CDS Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option MEAP application/ system option Installing MEAP application /...
  • Page 261 Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow 2-223 Local CDS ■ Distribution Flow Category Function ● Firmware Installation Flow Checking latest firmware version Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods. Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule Firmware Confirming and downloading firmware Updating downloaded firmware...

  • Page 262: Limitations And Cautions

    Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-224 Limitations and Cautions ● MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided. ■ Limitations Be sure to use the user mode to install. Changing Date/Time on Device : Operator of each company : User operation...
  • Page 263 Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions 2-225 Job/Function Receiving Printing Queued print Sending Queued send type jobs jobs COPY Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ PRINT Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ (end of job) Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ...

  • Page 264: Preparation

    Technology > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ 2-226 Preparation • For Install of Application Enabling [Install Application/ Installation Method Network Settings ■ Overview of Preparation Options] Button of User Mode LMS-linked Installation The following should be prepared before using Updater. LMA-linked installation via Local UI •...
  • Page 265 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-227 ■ Network Settings [COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] CDS Local CDS-FIRM To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user ● Connecting to External Network (administrator).
  • Page 266 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-228 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
  • Page 267 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings 2-229 Press [Software Management Settings] button. Note: • For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port number.
  • Page 268 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link 2-230 5. Press [Yes] button. ■ Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...
  • Page 269 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode 2-231 ■ Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode ■ Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation set to ON for users in advance.
  • Page 270 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode 2-232 ■ Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) ■ Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of Technician (Level 1)
  • Page 271 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode 2-233 F-2-426 F-2-427 2-233 Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode...

  • Page 272: System Management Operations

    Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting 2-234 System Management Operations 4. Press [Settings] button. ■ Various Setting ● Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.
  • Page 273 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting 2-235 • [Delivery Server Local CDS] ● Setting Log Level This section describes how to set system log levels. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3.
  • Page 274 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-236 ■ Displaying Logs 5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list. ● Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs. 1.
  • Page 275 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-237 4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-436 5. Press [Display Update Logs] button. F-2-438 F-2-437 2-237...
  • Page 276 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs 2-238 ● System Logs 5. Press [Display System Logs] button. This section describes how to confirm System Logs. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. F-2-441 6.
  • Page 277 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-239 ■ Communication Test NOTE: See the section of "Debug Logs" under “Version Upgrade via CDS”, “Version Upgrade” This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting”...
  • Page 278 Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test 2-240 6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation. F-2-444 F-2-446 5. Press [Yes] button. Caution: Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS. F-2-445 Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to execute the communication test to the distribution server).

  • Page 279: Maintenance

    Technology > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices 2-241 Maintenance ■ How to Replace Controller Boards The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced. ■ Upgrading Updater • Main Controller Board PCB 1 The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater.

  • Page 280: Faq

    Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware 2-242 No.4 Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the ■ FAQ on Installing Firmware firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked download”...
  • Page 281 Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment 2-243 No.9 ■ FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download? ● FAQ on the Number of Devices That Can Be Managed A: Yes.
  • Page 282 Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater 2-244 ■ FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option ■ FAQ on General Matters of Updater No.1 No.1 Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method? space? A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
  • Page 283 Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater 2-245 • For install Application Enabling [Install Application/ Installation Method Network Settings Options] Button of User Mode LMS-linked Installation LMA-linked installation via Local UI LMS-linked installation via Remote UI T-2-114 No.2 Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?

  • Page 284: Dcm

    Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-246 2) Reboot the Host machine. 3) Import the DCM data of the user mode. • As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
  • Page 285 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-247 ● Import/Export All from remote UI Note: The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the setting in the following service mode.
  • Page 286 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-248 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 Register Custom Size IP Address Settings Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration IP Address Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Subnet Mask Copy Screen Display Settings...
  • Page 287 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-249 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Firewall Settings Copy Auto Collate External Interface USB Settings Auto Orientation Accessibility Key Repetition Settings Select Color Settings for Copy Reversed Display (Color) Send Common Settings Adjustment/Maintenance...
  • Page 288 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview 2-250 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Check Dial Tone Before Sending Device Information Delivery Settings Fax TX Report Register Destinations Fax Activity Report Set Auto Delivery Set Line Line 1 to Line 2 Restrict Receiving Device Information Register Unit Telephone...
  • Page 289 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-251 ■ Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Address Book Set Destination Register Destinations The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
  • Page 290 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-252 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST MTF2-S1 COPIER ADJUST DFCH-B10 COPIER...
  • Page 291 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-253 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-Y COPIER ADJUST BLANK...
  • Page 292 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-254 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-M COPIER ADJUST HV-TR...
  • Page 293 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-255 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SH2 COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ...
  • Page 294 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-256 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CONFIG COPIER OPTION FNC-SW...
  • Page 295 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-257 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-RSCAN COPIER OPTION NETWORK...
  • Page 296 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-258 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMC-SLCT COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV...
  • Page 297 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-259 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV-SP2 COPIER OPTION USER...
  • Page 298 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM 2-260 Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 COPIER OPTION USER SCALLCMP COPIER OPTION MAX-PRC...
  • Page 299 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-261 ■ Import/export by service mode (external) Initial screen Large Middle Small Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting SORTER ADJUST THC-CL...
  • Page 300 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-262 2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP. F-2-450 3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. F-2-452 5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed. F-2-451 4.
  • Page 301 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-263 Note: Limitations regarding the DCM data password • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set is allowed only for service mode.) •...
  • Page 302 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-264 5. Remove USB memory device 4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK. 6. Specification of export file name Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device 1.
  • Page 303 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-265 6. Select SELECT. 8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->. F-2-462 F-2-464 7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press Note: Specification of file selection display •...
  • Page 304 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external) 2-266 11. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-466 Note: F-2-468 Specification of file selection display 12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK. •...
  • Page 305 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-267 ■ Import/export by service mode (internal) 2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>. When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen of service mode, service mode settings can be saved.
  • Page 306 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-268 6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export. F-2-475 7. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-473 5.
  • Page 307 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-269 ● Import 3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK. Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine. Overall flow Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
  • Page 308 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-270 5. Select PASSWD. 7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->. F-2-482 6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected. F-2-484 Note: Specification of file selection display...
  • Page 309 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal) 2-271 10. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-. F-2-486 Note: F-2-488 Specification of file selection display • "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.

  • Page 310: Periodical Service

    Periodical Service ■ Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts ■ Cleaning Parts Periodical Service...
  • Page 311 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts ■ Host machine Service Category Part Name Part No Unit Counter Remark Task Dust-blocking glass 1 1 minutes 50,000 Cleanig - Cleaning with Dust-blocking glass Cleaning tool p.
  • Page 312 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Service Category Part Name Part No Unit Counter Remark Task Cassette 1 feeding roller FC6-7083 1 5 minutes 150,000 Replace DRBL-1 C1-FD-RL p. 4-191 Cassette 2 feeding roller FC6-7083 1 5 minutes 150,000 Replace DRBL-1 C2-FD-RL p.
  • Page 313 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts ■ When Replacing Parts When replacing the Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1/DRBL-2) Toner filter Recycle toner bottle Dust-blocking glass cleaning pad F-3-1 Periodical Service >...
  • Page 314 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Developing unit(Bk) Developing unit(C) Developing unit(M) Developing unit(Y) Transfer Separation guide unit Secondary transfer outer roller Secondary transfer inner roller Primary transfer roller ITB cleaning blade F-3-2 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts...
  • Page 315 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Fixing bearing Roller pressure Fixing bearing Film unit(100V) (120V) (230V) F-3-3 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts...
  • Page 316 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller Cassette feeding 1 roller Pickup idler gear Cassette feeding 2 roller Cassette separation 1 roller Cassette separation 2 roller Pickup idler gear F-3-4 Periodical Service >...
  • Page 317 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts ■ Option (Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts) Adjustment Category Part Name Part No Number Interval Counter Alarm Remark Reference (Yes/No) Duplex Color Image Pickup roller unit FL3-4619 5 minutes 80K DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL Reader Unit-E1 Separation roller FC5-3115 5 minutes 80K...
  • Page 318 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts Adjustment Category Part Name Part No Number Interval Counter Alarm Remark Reference (Yes/No) Booklet Finisher-J1 Stapler FM2-0665 30 minutes 500K DRBL-2 FIN-STPR 610001 Delivery static charge eliminator (L) FC5-3667/ 30 minutes 1,000,000 sheets DRBL-2 DL-STC 4A3-5449...
  • Page 319 Periodical Service > Consumable Parts,Replacement Parts, and Cleaning Parts 3-10 ■ List of Work for Scheduled Servicing(Reader) CL: Cleaning LU: Lubricate AD: Adjustment CH: Inspection Work Interval Parts name Parts No. Number Reference Installation timely Copyboard glass (Surface) FL2-9792-000 Copyboard glass (Surface/Back) Including the white plate positioning of the glass surface.

  • Page 320: Cleaning Parts

    Periodical Service > Cleaning Parts 3-11 Cleaning Parts [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [10] [13] [13] [13] [13] [12] [11] Second Delivery Roller Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly [11] Vertical path sensor [16] Shutter cover Third Delivery Roller Duplex Feed Lower Roller [12] Transparency Sensor [17] Fixing separation guide Second/Third Delivery Inlet Roller...

  • Page 321: Parts Replacement And Cleaning

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ List of Parts ■ Main Controller ■ Laser Exposure System ■ Image Formation System ■ Fixing System ■ Pickup Feed System ■ Option ■ Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board Parts Replacement and Cleaning...

  • Page 322: List Of Cover

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Cover List of Parts Name Glass retainer (Right) Reader front cover List of Cover Control panel under cover Control panel upper cover Control panel side cover 1 [21] Control panel side cover 2 [20] Front right cover [19]...
  • Page 323 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Cover Name [51] [22] Reader rear cover [50] [23] Reader rear under cover [24] Left rear sub cover [25] Left rear cover [49] [22] [26] Rear cover [27] Rear lower cover [48] [28] Filter cover...
  • Page 324 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Cover [61] [60] [52] [59] [58] [57] [53] [56] [54] [55] F-4-3 Name [52] Inner output cover [53] Inner right cover [54] Output tray [55] Output tray guide [56] Output stopper [57] Output frame...

  • Page 325: List Of Main Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout List of Main Unit ■ Unit Layout F-4-4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout...
  • Page 326 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout [10] [14] [11] [19],[20] [15] [12] [16] [13] [17] [18] F-4-5 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout...
  • Page 327 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout [21] [22] [24] [23] [26] [25] [27] [28] [29] F-4-6 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout...
  • Page 328 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout [30] F-4-7 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout...
  • Page 329 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Unit Layout Name Refarence Control Panel Recycle toner container Hopper Unit ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Unit Not compatible with iR-ADV C5051 series Toner container(Bk) Toner container(C) Toner container(M) Toner container(Y) [10]...

  • Page 330: Clutch / Solenoid

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Clutch / Solenoid 4-10 Clutch / Solenoid F-4-8 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks Item No. Remarks Third delivery flapper solenoid Third delivery flapper solenoid P006 1:ON SL>7 SL-ON>OK Second delivery flapper solenoid Second delivery flapper solenoid P005...
  • Page 331 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Clutch / Solenoid 4-11 [12] [11] [10] F-4-9 F-4-10 4-11 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Clutch / Solenoid...
  • Page 332 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Clutch / Solenoid 4-12 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks Item No. Remarks Multi-purpose tray pickup clutch Multi-purpose tray pickup clutch P010 1:ON CL>1 CL-ON>OK Multi-purpose tray lifting solenoid Multi-purpose tray lifting solenoid P005 1:ON...

  • Page 333: Switch

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch 4-13 Switch F-4-11 4-13 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch...
  • Page 334 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch 4-14 F-4-12 4-14 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch...
  • Page 335 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switch 4-15 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks AC interlock switch AC interlock switch DC interlock switch 1 DC interlock switch 1 DC interlock switch 2 DC interlock switch 2 Cassette 2 size switch B Cassette 2 size switch B P012...

  • Page 336: Motor

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-16 Motor [10] [11] [12] F-4-13 F-4-14 4-16 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor...
  • Page 337 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-17 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks Item No. Remarks Duplex feed motor Duplex feed motor P011 1:enable MTR>20 MTR-ON>OK Cassette 1 pickup motor Cassette 1 pickup motor P014 1:enable MTR>16...
  • Page 338 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-18 [13] [18] [17] [15] [16] [14] [25] [19] [24] [23] [22] [20] [21] F-4-15 4-18 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor...
  • Page 339 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-19 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks Item No. Remarks [13] Primary transfer disengagement motor Primary transfer disengagement motor P026 1:enable [14] ITB motor ITB motor MTR>13* MTR-ON>OK [15] ITB displacement control motor ITB displacement control motor...
  • Page 340 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-20 [26] [27] [28] [29] [33] [32] [31] [30] F-4-16 4-20 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor...
  • Page 341 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motor 4-21 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Item No. Remarks [26] Drum motor (Bk) Drum motor (Bk) MTR>13* MTR-ON>OK [27] Drum motor (C) Drum motor (C) MTR>13* MTR-ON>OK [28] Drum motor (M) Drum motor (M) MTR>13* MTR-ON>OK...

  • Page 342: Fan

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan 4-22 F-4-17 F-4-18 4-22 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan...
  • Page 343 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan 4-23 [11] [12] [10] [13] F-4-19 4-23 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan...
  • Page 344 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fan 4-24 PART-CHK INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks Item No. Remarks Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 P006 1:ON FAN>1 FAN-ON>OK Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 P006 1:ON...

  • Page 345: Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-25 Sensor [10] [18] [17] [16] [11] [15] [12] [14] [13] F-4-20 4-25 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor...
  • Page 346 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-26 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks PS43 Third delivery sensor Third delivery sensor P004 1:paper PS39 Reverse sensor Reverse sensor P005 1:paper PS40 Duplex inlet sensor Duplex inlet sensor P004 1:paper PS57...
  • Page 347 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-27 [19] [34] [33] [32] [20] [31] [30] [29] [21] [28] [43] [22] [44] [23] [27] [35] [45] [24] [36] [25] [46] [37] [38] [26] [39] [40] [41] [42] [47] [48] [49] [50]...
  • Page 348 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-28 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks [19] Toner container cam HP sensor (Bk) Toner container cam HP sensor (Bk) P024 1:HP [20] Piezo sensor (Bk) Hopper Unit P024 1:toner [21] Toner supply sensor (Bk)
  • Page 349 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-29 [52] [54] [51] [53] [55] [56] [57] [63] [62] [66] [61] [67] [65] [60] [59] [58] [64] [68] [69] [70] [71] [72] F-4-22 4-29 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor...
  • Page 350 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-30 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks [51] PS44 First delivery tray full sensor First delivery tray full sensor P009 0:full [52] PS20 Right door sensor Right door sensor P009 0:DOOR_OPEN [53]...
  • Page 351 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-31 [75] [73] [74] [76] [84] [83] [77] [82] [81] [78] [79] [80] F-4-23 4-31 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor...
  • Page 352 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensor 4-32 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Address Remarks [73] PS19 Right lower door sensor Right lower door sensor P014 0:DOOR_OPEN [74] PS38 Duplex paper sensor Duplex paper sensor P013 1:paper [75] UN52 Multi-purpose tray size sensor...

  • Page 353: Heater / Other

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other 4-33 Heater / Other F-4-24 4-33 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other...
  • Page 354 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other 4-34 F-4-25 4-34 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other...
  • Page 355 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Heater / Other 4-35 INDEX No. Name Replacement unit Fixing heater Film Unit Sub thermistor 2 Film Unit Temperature fuse Film Unit Main thermistor 2 Film Unit Main thermistor 1 Film Unit Sub thermistor 1 Film Unit Drum heater (Bk)

  • Page 356: Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-36 [10] [11] [12] F-4-26 4-36 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB...
  • Page 357 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-37 INDEX No. Name Replacement Unit UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB (Y) Toner sensor relay PCB (Y) UN40 Toner sensor relay PCB (M) Toner sensor relay PCB (M) UN41 Toner sensor relay PCB (C) Toner sensor relay PCB (C) UN42 Toner sensor relay PCB (Bk)
  • Page 358 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-38 [16] [15] [14] [13] [20] [19] [18] [17] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] F-4-27 4-38 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB...
  • Page 359 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-39 INDEX No. Name Replacement Unit [13] UN43 Developing sub bias PCB (Y) Developing Assembly [14] UN44 Developing sub bias PCB (M) Developing Assembly [15] UN45 Developing sub bias PCB (C) Developing Assembly [16] UN46...
  • Page 360 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-40 [28] [29] [30] [31] [43] [32] [42] [37] [33] [34] [41] [35] [36] [40] [39] [38] F-4-28 4-40 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB...
  • Page 361 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCB 4-41 INDEX No. Name Replacement Unit [28] [29] Riser PCB Riser PCB [30] DC controller PCB DC controller PCB [31] Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB 2 [32] UN17 HVT 2 PCB HVT 2 PCB [33]...

  • Page 362: Conector

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-42 Conector F-4-29 4-42 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 363 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-43 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J102 DC controller PCB J822 ECO-ID J103 DC controller PCB J253 Feed driver PCB J104 DC controller PCB J5066 J1300...
  • Page 364 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-44 F-4-30 4-44 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 365 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-45 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J118 DC controller PCB J825 J102 UN13 Laser driver PCB (Y) J118 DC controller PCB J825 J203 UN12...
  • Page 366 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-46 F-4-31 4-46 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 367 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-47 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J255 Feed driver PCB J5052 J5067 PS23 Primary transfer disengagement sensor 2 J255 Feed driver PCB J5052 J6032 PS22...
  • Page 368 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-48 F-4-32 4-48 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 369 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-49 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J254 Feed driver PCB J5051 J755 J601 J900 UN19 Drum unit new/old detection PCB J254 Feed driver PCB J5051 J755...
  • Page 370 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-50 F-4-33 4-50 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 371 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-51 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J262 Feed driver PCB J5032 J6076 PS40 Duplex inlet sensor J262 Feed driver PCB J5032 J6075 PS43 Third delivery sensor...
  • Page 372 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-52 F-4-34 4-52 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 373 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-53 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J260 Feed driver PCB J5075 J5012 J6103 PS31 Fixing shutter HP sensor J260 Feed driver PCB J5075 J5012 J6102...
  • Page 374 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-54 F-4-35 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J273 Cassette feed driver PCB J6060 Laser shutter motor J273 Cassette feed driver PCB J6123 FM10 Process cartridge fan (front)
  • Page 375 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-55 F-4-36 4-55 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 376 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-56 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J274 Cassette feed driver PCB J5073 J6127 Cassette 2 size switch B J274 Cassette feed driver PCB J5073 J6128 Cassette 2 size switch A...
  • Page 377 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-57 F-4-37 4-57 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 378 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-58 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J276 Cassette feed driver PCB J6155 Cassette 1 pickup motor J276 Cassette feed driver PCB J6156 Cassette 2 pickup motor J277...
  • Page 379 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-59 F-4-38 4-59 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 380 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-60 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J304 Drum driver PCB J5070 J6004 Primary transfer disengagement motor J304 Drum driver PCB J5070 J6003 ITB displacement control motor J304...
  • Page 381 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-61 F-4-39 4-61 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 382 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-62 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J303 Drum driver PCB J6008 Toner supply clutch (Bk) J303 Drum driver PCB J6007 Toner supply clutch (C) J303 Drum driver PCB J6006...
  • Page 383 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-63 F-4-40 4-63 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 384 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-64 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J413 Relay PCB J691 All-night power supply PCB J421 Relay PCB J808 Reader controll PCB J425 Relay PCB J650...
  • Page 385 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-65 F-4-41 4-65 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 386 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-66 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J411 Relay PCB J835 UN11 12V power supply PCB J412 Relay PCB J834 UN10 24V power supply PCB2 J422 Relay PCB J129...
  • Page 387 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-67 F-4-42 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J1003 AC driver PCB AC interlock switch AC interlock switch J5006 J5087 J5012 J5007 J5013 Fixing heater J5014...
  • Page 388 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-68 F-4-43 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J1001 AC driver PCB AC in cable J1002 AC driver PCB J5099 J866 J1002 AC driver PCB J5099 J833...
  • Page 389 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-69 F-4-44 4-69 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 390 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-70 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J1004 AC driver PCB J1102 UN10 24V power supply PCB2 J1004 AC driver PCB J1101 UN11 12V power supply PCB J1006...
  • Page 391 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-71 F-4-45 4-71 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 392 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-72 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J202 UN12 Laser driver PCB (M) J103 UN13 Laser driver PCB (Y) J204 UN12 Laser driver PCB (M) J6159 Image skew correction motor (M J204...
  • Page 393 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-73 F-4-46 4-73 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 394 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-74 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J902 UN19 Drum unit new/old detection PCB J5093 J6114 ATR sensor (Y) J902 UN19 Drum unit new/old detection PCB J5093 UN43 Developing sub bias PCB (Y)
  • Page 395 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-75 F-4-47 4-75 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 396 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-76 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J658 UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB (Y) J6154 Toner container cam HP sensor (Y) J658 UN39 Toner sensor relay PCB (Y) J6035...
  • Page 397 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-77 F-4-48 4-77 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 398 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-78 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Main controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 1 USB(H) Main controller PCB 1 USB Device Port Main controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 1 Main controller PCB 1...
  • Page 399 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-79 F-4-49 4-79 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector...
  • Page 400 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Conector 4-80 KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name Intermediate Connector KeyNo. J No. Symbol Parts Name J1001 CPU PCB Mein Controller PCB 1 J1002 CPU PCB Mein Controller PCB 1 J1003 CPU PCB J4001 Sub key PCB...

  • Page 401: Main Controller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Procedure 4-81 Main Controller ■ Procedure 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover. Removing the HDD 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover. • 1 screw (RS tight; M4) ■...
  • Page 402 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Procedure 4-82 4) Disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable from HDD, and move them to 6) Remove the plate. the hole side of the Controller Box. •...
  • Page 403 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the HDD > Actions after Replacement 4-83 ■ Actions after Replacement ● When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager 1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of the 1) HDD format leading card which is used for Department ID.

  • Page 404: Removing The Main Controller Pcb 1

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Procedure 4-84 Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 2) Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable. ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover. 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
  • Page 405 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions before Replacement 4-85 Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 NOTE: If option PCB is installed, remove it. ■ Actions before Replacement Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory device or CAUTION: an HDD from download mode.
  • Page 406 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Preparations 4-86 5) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD). ■ Preparations 6) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host machine. ●...
  • Page 407 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Procedure 4-87 2) If the Reader Unit is installed, remove the reader signal cable. ■ Procedure • 1 connector 1) If the FAX Unit is installed, remove the connector of communication cable. F-4-68 2) Hold the grip and remove the Main Controller PCB 2.
  • Page 408 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Actions after Replacement 4-88 device. CAUTION: 7) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (USB). 8) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host machine. At installation, avoid the harness, hold the grip in raised condition, put the Main Controller PCB 2 all the way in, tilt the grip, and install it.

  • Page 409: Opening The Controller Box

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Opening the Controller Box > Procedure 4-89 Opening the Controller Box ■ Procedure 1) When the Reader is installed, remove the reader power cable. ■ Preparations • 2 connectors 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-84) •...

  • Page 410: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure 4-90 Removing the DC Controller PCB 2-2) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit. • 3 screws ■ Actions before Replacement When replacing the DC Controller PCB, execute the following Service Mode to backup the DC Controller PCB SRAM.

  • Page 411: Removing The Main Power Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Preparations 4-91 Removing the Main Power Unit CAUTION: ■ Preparations There is a connector on the backside of the DC Controller PCB. When removing the DC Controller PCB, be careful about the connecter.
  • Page 412 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Main Power Unit > Procedure 4-92 7) Remove the Rear Lower Cover. ■ Procedure • 2 rubber caps 1) Open the Drum Driver Unit. • 2 screws • 1 screw •...

  • Page 413: Removing The Ac Driver

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the AC Driver > Procedure 4-93 Removing the AC Driver 3) Pull out the Main Power Unit. • 3 connectors ■ Preparations • 3 screws 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-84) Connector 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.

  • Page 414: Removing The Control Panel

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Control Panel > Procedure 4-94 Removing the Control Panel 3) Stand the Control Panel as indicated. ■ Procedure CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the Control Panel when pulling it out. 1) Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold.
  • Page 415 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Control Panel > Procedure 4-95 5) Remove the cable. • Harness Guide [A] • 1 wire saddle • 2 connectors Connectors Wire Saddle F-4-91 4-95 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller > Removing the Control Panel > Procedure...

  • Page 416: Laser Exposure System

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Dust-blocking Glass Cleaning Pad > Procedure 4-96 Laser Exposure System 2) Clean the Dust-blocking Glass from the 4 holes of the Waste Toner Container. Cleaning the Dust-blocking Glass Dust-blocking glass ■...

  • Page 417: Removing The Laser Scanner Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparations 4-97 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ● Remove the ITB Unit 3) Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark. ■...
  • Page 418 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparations 4-98 5) Remove the 2 connectors. CAUTION: • When pulling out the ITB Unit, it may drop because it does not click at stop position if pulled out while lifting it.
  • Page 419 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparations 4-99 7) Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure, and remove in the direction of the arrow. 8) Pull out the Process Unit until it stops. •...
  • Page 420 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparations 4-100 11) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light. ● Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover. 13) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
  • Page 421 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure 4-101 15) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover. ■ Procedure • 1 screw • 1 hook CAUTION: Hook When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit When removing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check the serial numbers affixed on both units and installation position of the units before operation.
  • Page 422 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure 4-102 2) Remove the Image Formation Suction Duct. 4) Remove the Left Duct Unit. • 1 screw • 1 connector • 1 claw • 2 screws Image formation suction duct Connector Screw...
  • Page 423 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Actions after Replacement 4-103 6) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit. CAUTION: • 4 connectors At installation, pass the harness through the Sheet Guide and install it. Laser scanner unit Connectors Connectors...

  • Page 424: Image Formation System

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Preparations 4-104 Image Formation System Removing the ITB Unit ■ Preparations Removing the Toner Filter 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover. ■...
  • Page 425 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-105 ■ Procedure 3) Remove the 2 connectors. 1) Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark. (If it is not aligned, adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark.) Triangle mark Triangle mark...
  • Page 426 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure 4-106 4) Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly. CAUTION: • 2 screws When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever Stop label position below the position where clicky sense is felt.

  • Page 427: Cleaning The Patch Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor > Procedure 4-107 Cleaning the Patch Sensor CAUTION: ■ Preparations • Be careful not to make mistakes when installing since there is no compatibility between the ITB Unit of iR-ADV-C52XX series and that of iR-ADV-C50XX series. 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) •...

  • Page 428: Remove The Patch Sensor (Front,Center,Rear)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear) > Procedure 4-108 Remove the Patch Sensor (front,center,rear) 2) Remove the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide. Be sure not to put too much force on the Pre- secondary Transfer Guide when removing it. ■...

  • Page 429: Removing The Itb Cleaning Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure 4-109 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 4) Remove the Wire Saddle, and Edge Saddle to make the Sensor Assembly moving freely. • 3 Wire Saddles ■...

  • Page 430: Removing The Itb Cleaning Blade Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure 4-110 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit 1) Hold the left and right grip and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit in the direction of the arrow. •...

  • Page 431: Installing The Itb Cleaning Blade Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure 4-111 Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit 1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit and put it on the paper. • 1 Stepped Screw ■...
  • Page 432 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure 4-112 3) While paying attention not to bend the Protection Sheet, lift the sheet using a screwdriver. After that, check that the sheet that is being lifted is above the pad. Paper Sheet 2) Check that the Blade Alignment Plate is installed, and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade...

  • Page 433: Removing The Itb

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure 4-113 Removing the ITB 4) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below. ■...
  • Page 434 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure 4-114 3) Pull the ITB Pressure Release Lever to the front. 6) Lift the ITB and stand it on the ITB Cover. 4) Remove the harness. CAUTION: •...
  • Page 435 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure 4-115 7) Pull out the front pin. 9) Insert papers as shown in the figure to prevent the ITB getting damage by the plate when removing the ITB. NOTE: To lock the pressure, pull out the pin while holding the ITB Unit with hand.
  • Page 436 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Actions after Replacement 4-116 ■ Actions after Replacement CAUTION: 1) Turn ON the power of the host machine. Do not touch the surface of ITB Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and 2) When the machine is in standby condition, execute the following in user mode: (Settings/ Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.

  • Page 437: Removing The Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) > Procedure 4-117 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) 1) Pull out the pin, and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight. 2) Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position. ■...
  • Page 438 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) > Procedure 4-118 5) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk). CAUTION: • 1 Shaft Support (Front) • 1 spring When the parts (Shaft support (front), Shaft support (rear), Spring) configuring the Primary Transfer Roller of each color(Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, be sure to refer to the list in the figure below.

  • Page 439: Removing The Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Procedure 4-119 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) name shape feature Spring (Bk) Blue marking on the ■ Preparations side. Shorter compared to 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) the springs for YMC.
  • Page 440 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Procedure 4-120 1) Pull out the pin, and make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight. 5) While holding down the Shaft Support (Front), remove the Engagement/Disengagement 2) Install the pin removed in step 1 to the original position Arm from the boss by tilting it.
  • Page 441 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Procedure 4-121 7) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller (C). CAUTION: • 1 Shaft Support (Front) • 1 spring When the parts (Shaft support (front), Shaft support (rear), Spring) configuring the Primary Transfer Roller of each color(Bk/C/M/Y) are mixed, be sure to refer to the list in Shaft Support the figure below.
  • Page 442 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) > Actions after Replacement 4-122 name shape feature ■ Actions after Replacement Spring (Bk) Blue marking on the side. 1) Turn ON the power of the host machine. Shorter compared to 2) When the machine is in standby condition, execute the following in user mode: (Settings/ the springs for YMC.

  • Page 443: Removing The Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure 4-123 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ■ Preparations 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Remove the ITB Unit.(Refer to page 4-105) 4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit.(Refer to page 4-109)
  • Page 444 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Actions after Replacement 4-124 F-4-163 5) Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller. CAUTION: Be careful of the installation direction when installing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
  • Page 445 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Actions after Replacement 4-125 ● If not, execute the following adjustment. When the values are above 350 Move the ITB Motor Support Plate up. Moving it by 1 mm changes the values of ITB-POS and ITB-POS2 by approx.

  • Page 446: Reinstalling The Itb

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Procedure 4-126 Reinstalling the ITB NOTE: Cover the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package as shown in the ■ Preparations figure. (Place the slant area to the ITB Motor side.) The framed area is the area where the ITB is easily damaged, so be sure that the area is covered with the ITB Installation 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) Auxiliary Sheet.
  • Page 447 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Procedure 4-127 3) Place papers on the ITB Cover to prevent bending of the ITB because pressure is applied 6) Put the ITB under the Belt Retainer Sheet (on the left side of the figure), bring the ITB to a point when installing the ITB.
  • Page 448 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Procedure 4-128 7) Return the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit to straight, and then install the pin 9) Install the rear pin. removed. • 1 screw • 1 screw F-4-176 F-4-178 8) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover, hook it on the 2 hooks, and then install it to the...
  • Page 449 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Procedure 4-129 11) PuII the ITB Pressure Release Lever and Install the harness. CAUTION: • 1 edge saddle • 3 wire saddles Make sure that the shaft is fixed to the fixing member. F-4-180 CAUTION: Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate.
  • Page 450 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the ITB > Actions after Replacement 4-130 CAUTION: CAUTION: • When replacing ITB with a new one, after installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB When replacing ITB with a new one, affix the label to the specific position near the Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below.

  • Page 451: Removing The Recycle Toner Bottle

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling Out the Process Unit > Procedure 4-131 Removing the Recycle Toner Bottle Pulling Out the Process Unit ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) ■...

  • Page 452: Removing The Process Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit > Procedure 4-132 Removing the Process Unit 3) Pull out the Process Unit until it stops. • 2 screws ■ Preparations 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Pull out the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-131) ■...

  • Page 453: Reinstalling The Process Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Process Unit > Procedure 4-133 Reinstalling the Process Unit 3) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light. Paper ■ Preparations 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Pull out the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-131) 4) Remove the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-132)
  • Page 454 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Process Unit > Procedure 4-134 3) Install the right and left rails and the Process Unit with 4 stepped screws. 4) Slowly take the Process Unit back to the host machine and fix it with 2 screws. F-4-195 F-4-193 CAUTION:...

  • Page 455: Removing The Drum Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit > Procedure 4-135 Removing the Drum Unit 5) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the left direction to apply the pressure. ■ Preparations CAUTION: When applying the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever, make sure that the 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) protrusion of grip is aligned with the lower triangle mark of plate.

  • Page 456: Reinstalling The Drum Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Drum Unit > Procedure 4-136 Reinstalling the Drum Unit ■ Preparations 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Pull out the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-131) 4) Remove the Drum Unit.(Refer to page 4-135) Grips...
  • Page 457 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Drum Unit > Procedure 4-137 1) Hold the grip and install it from the top vertically. NOTE: When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following procedures.

  • Page 458: Removing The Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure 4-138 Removing the Developing Assembly NOTE: 2-2) While the paper is set, install the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine. ■ Preparations Drum Unit (BK) 1) Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 2) Remove the ITB Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Pull out the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-131)
  • Page 459 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly > Procedure 4-139 1) Remove the harness from the 2 harness guides and remove the connector. CAUTION: Fit the 2 pins of the Developing Assembly into the holes of the Process Unit, and insert the 2 pins of the stopper in the holes of the Developing Assembly when assembling.

  • Page 460: Installing A New Developing Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing a new Developing Assembly > Procedure 4-140 Installing a new Developing Assembly ■ Actions after Replacement Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs ■ Preparations depending on the color.
  • Page 461 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing a new Developing Assembly > Procedure 4-141 CAUTION: CAUTION: When removing the Seal on the Developing Assembly, be sure to lift it slowly and If the Seal on the Developing Assembly is torn, remove the torn seal by pulling the end vertically.

  • Page 462: Removing The Waste Toner Feed Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Preparations 4-142 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit ■ Actions after Replacement ■ Preparations Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs depending on the color.
  • Page 463 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit > Procedure 4-143 ■ Procedure 3) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the PCB. • 3 Wire Saddles 1) Remove the Process Unit Right Front Cover. •...

  • Page 464: Removing The Secondary Transfer Outer Roller And Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure 4-144 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and 4) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit. • 6 Screws Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit NOTE: ■...
  • Page 465 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure 4-145 1) Place the paper to put the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit. 4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit. 2) Remove the rear stopper.

  • Page 466: Reinstalling The Secondary Transfer Outer Roller And Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit > Procedure 4-146 Reinstalling the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and 2) Fit the protrusion with the groove of the guide and install the bushing. 3) Install the spring onto both side of protrusion.

  • Page 467: Removing The Toner Bottle Manually

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Preparations 4-147 Removing the Toner Bottle manually 4) Fit the spring on the Duplex Unit to the protrusion on the bearing holder of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit and install it one after other. ■...
  • Page 468 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Preparations 4-148 4) If the Reader Unit is installed, remove the reader signal cable. 6) Remove the Rear Cover. • 1 connector • 3 rubber caps •...
  • Page 469 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Bottle manually > Procedure 4-149 ■ Procedure NOTE: • If the Fax Unit is not installed, refer to step 8-1). • If the Fax Unit is installed, refer to step 8-2). NOTE: This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle (Bk).

  • Page 470: Removing The Main Drive Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Preparations 4-150 Removing the Main Drive Unit 5) Pull out the toner container. ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-147) 3) Remove the Left Rear Cover and the Left Rear Sub Cover.(Refer to page 4-147) 4) Remove the Connector Cover.
  • Page 471 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure 4-151 6) Remove the Rear Lower Cover. ■ Procedure • 2 rubber caps 1) Remove the Left Upper Cover. • 2 screws • 5 rubber caps •...
  • Page 472 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure 4-152 2) Avoid the harness and open the Controller Box. 5) Remove the Harness Guide Cover. • 2 screws • 1 screw Harness guide cover F-4-246 F-4-249 3) Open the High-voltage PCB.
  • Page 473 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Main Drive Unit > Procedure 4-153 8) Remove the Fan Duct 1. 10) Disconnect the 9 connectors of the Drum Driver PCB and the 4 Reuse Bands, and free •...

  • Page 474: Removing The Toner Container Front Inner Cover

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover > Procedure 4-154 Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover CAUTION: ■ Preparations Be sure to fit the 2 holes of the Main Drive Unit to the shafts of the host machine, and fit the 4 couplings into the holes of the host machine when installing.
  • Page 475 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Front Inner Cover > Procedure 4-155 2) Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and Remove the Small Plate. 5) Remove the Delivery Tray. • 1 screw (P tight) •...

  • Page 476: Removing The Hopper (M)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (M) > Procedure 4-156 Removing the Hopper (M) 7) Remove the Toner Container Front Inner Cover. • 1 connector ■ Preparations • 1 wire saddle • 4 screws (RS) 1) Release the lock of Toner Container.
  • Page 477 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (M) > Procedure 4-157 2) While avoiding the duct sheet, remove the Hopper Unit. CAUTION: • 1 connector • 4 screws If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the operation failure.

  • Page 478: Removing The Hopper (Y)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Procedure 4-158 Removing the Hopper (Y) CAUTION: ■ Preparations When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close Rod Lever and install it. 1) Release the lock of Toner Container.
  • Page 479 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Procedure 4-159 2) Remove the Left Cover. 4) While avoiding the duct sheet, remove the Hopper Unit. • 5 rubber caps • 1 connector • 5 screws •...
  • Page 480 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Y) > Actions after Replacement 4-160 CAUTION: CAUTION: If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close operation failure.

  • Page 481: Removing The Hopper (C)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Procedure 4-161 Removing the Hopper (C) 3) Remove the 2 screws from the Harness Guide. ■ Preparations 1) Release the lock of Toner Container. (By service mode) 2) Open the Front Cover, the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Remove the ITB Unit.(Refer to page 4-105) 4) Remove the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-132)
  • Page 482 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Procedure 4-162 6) Remove the rail Retaining Plate. 8) While avoiding the Duct Sheet, remove the Hopper Unit. • 4 screws (M4 binding) • 1 connector •...
  • Page 483 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (C) > Actions after Replacement 4-163 CAUTION: CAUTION: If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close operation failure.

  • Page 484: Removing The Hopper (Bk)

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Procedure 4-164 Removing the Hopper (Bk) 3) Remove the Duct Sheet. • 2 screws (binding) ■ Preparations 1) Release the lock of Toner Container (By service mode). 2) Open the Front Cover, the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-104) 3) Remove the ITB Unit.(Refer to page 4-105) 4) Remove the Process Unit.(Refer to page 4-132)
  • Page 485 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Procedure 4-165 4) Remove the Hopper Unit. CAUTION: • 1 connector • 6 screws If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the •...
  • Page 486 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper (Bk) > Actions after Replacement 4-166 CAUTION: When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod aLever with the Toner Cover Open/Close Rod Lever and install it. Toner Cover Open/Close Rod Lever Rod Lever F-4-291...

  • Page 487: Fixing System

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure 4-167 Fixing System ■ Procedure 1) Open the Fixing Rail and loosen the 5 screws (or 4 screws). Removing the Fixing Assembly NOTE: The screw [A] has been newly added. The machine has 5 screws or 4 screws. ■...
  • Page 488 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Assembly > Procedure 4-168 2) Pinch and pull out the tab of Fixing Assembly. CAUTION: • When installing the Fixing Assembly, be sure to insert it until it stops and then tighten the screws while holding the area [A] part as shown in the figure below.

  • Page 489: Removing The Film Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Film Unit > Procedure 4-169 Removing the Film Unit 3) Remove the Shutter Unit. • 4 screws ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Fixing Unit.(Refer to page 4-167) ■...
  • Page 490 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Film Unit > Procedure 4-170 7) Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit. CAUTION: Do not leave the Pressure Roller engaged for a long time. 5) Open the left and right Pressure Levers.
  • Page 491 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Film Unit > Actions after Replacement 4-171 CAUTION: CAUTION: Point to Note when Installing the Fixing Separation Guide: Example of improper installation: Be sure to check that Fixing Separation Guide [1] is installed properly. •...

  • Page 492: Cleaning The Fixing Separation Guide

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Shutter Cover > Procedure 4-172 Cleaning the Fixing Separation Guide Cleaning the Shutter Cover ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Fixing Unit.(Refer to page 4-167) 2) Remove the Fixing Unit.(Refer to page 4-167)

  • Page 493: Removing The Pressure Roller And Pressure Roller Bearing

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Procedure 4-173 Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller 3) Remove the Shutter Unit. • 4 screws Bearing ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Fixing Unit.(Refer to page 4-167) 3) Remove the Film Unit.(Refer to page 4-169) ■...
  • Page 494 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing > Actions after Replacement 4-174 2) When installing/removing it, to prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged, insert the 4) Remove the Pressure Roller and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings from the Pressure Roller paper (approx.

  • Page 495: Pickup Feed System

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide > Procedure 4-175 Pickup Feed System Cleaning the Feed Contact Point Guide ■ Preparations Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Guide 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...

  • Page 496: Cleaning The Registration Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly > Procedure 4-176 Cleaning the Registration Roller Cleaning the Pre-registration Guide Assembly ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...

  • Page 497: Cleaning The Transparency Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet > Procedure 4-177 Cleaning the Transparency Sensor Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...
  • Page 498 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet > Procedure 4-178 2) Remove the wire from the machine and further open the Right Lower Cover. 4) Clean the Lightproof Sheet with dry lint-free paper. Wire Lightproof Sheet Right lower cover...

  • Page 499: Cleaning The Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller > Procedure 4-179 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly Cleaning the Post-fixing Roller ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...

  • Page 500: Cleaning The Fixing Delivery Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel > Procedure 4-180 Cleaning the Fixing Delivery Roller Cleaning the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...

  • Page 501: Cleaning The Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis, and the First, Second and Third Delivery Rollers > Procedure 4-181 Cleaning the Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel Cleaning the Second and Third Delivery Roller and Wheeis, and the First, Second and Third Delivery ■...

  • Page 502: Removing The Second And Third Delivery Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Preparations 4-182 Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
  • Page 503 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Second and Third Delivery Unit > Procedure 4-183 4) Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover. ■ Procedure • 1 screw 1) Remove the 2 connectors and 3 wire saddles. •...

  • Page 504: Removing The First Delivery Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the First Delivery Unit > Procedure 4-184 Removing the First Delivery Unit 4) Remove the Second and Third Delivery Unit. • 4 screws ■ Preparations Second and third delivery unit 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 2) Remove the Right Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-182) 3) Remove the Front Right Cover.(Refer to page 4-182)
  • Page 505 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the First Delivery Unit > Procedure 4-185 3) Open the Fixing Assembly and remove the Fixing Gear Cover. CAUTION: • 1 screw At installation, align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it. Fixing gear cover Sensor flag First delivery tray...

  • Page 506: Removing The Duplex Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Duplex Unit > Procedure 4-186 Removing the Duplex Unit 3) Hold the sides of Duplex Unit and remove it. ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) ■...

  • Page 507: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller > Procedure 4-187 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller 3) Tilt the shaft, pull the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it. ■ Preparations CAUTION: Be careful of the Split Pin securing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.

  • Page 508: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure 4-188 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 2) While holding down the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft, remove the Middle Feed Guide. ■ Preparations •...
  • Page 509 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure 4-189 CAUTION: CAUTION: Installing the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide Align the groove of Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller with the protrusion of limiter In order to align the height of the Middle Feed Guide and the Front Feed Guide, be sure and push it until it clicks.
  • Page 510 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure 4-190 3. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover, and fit the holes of the Front Feed Guide to CAUTION: the 2 claws of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Frame. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Sub Cover and make sure that the bearing part of Multi- purpose Tray Pickup Sensor Flag is surely installed.

  • Page 511: Removing The Pickup Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Feed Roller > Procedure 4-191 Removing the Pickup Roller Removing the Feed Roller ■ Procedure ■ Procedure NOTE: NOTE: This procedure describes the removing step of cassette 1 Pickup Roller. Go through the This procedure describes the removing steps of cassette 1 Feed Roller.

  • Page 512: Removing The Separation Roller

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear > Procedure 4-192 Removing the Separation Roller Removing the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear ■ Preparations ■ Preparations 1) Open the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.(Refer to page 4-175) 1) Remove the Cassette1 and Cassette2.

  • Page 513: Removing The Right Lower Cover

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Lower Cover > Procedure 4-193 Removing the Right Lower Cover 1-2) When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed, remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 and the Right Front Cover 3. ■...
  • Page 514 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Lower Cover > Procedure 4-194 2) Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover. 6) Remove the 2 screws and the connector. 3) If the Cassette Pedestal is connected, Open the Cassette Right Lower Cover. 4) Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover.
  • Page 515 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Lower Cover > Procedure 4-195 7) Remove the E-rings at the front and the rear sides, and disconnect the arm while closing 8) Remove the wire from the host machine and remove the Right Lower Cover. the Right Lower Cover.

  • Page 516: Removing The Cassette 1 Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit > Procedure 4-196 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 3) Remove the Pickup Harness. • 1 wire saddle ■ Preparations • 1 edge saddle • 2 connectors 1) Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2.

  • Page 517: Removing The Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path Sensor

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path Sensor > Procedure 4-197 Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path 3) Disconnect the round shape terminal, and 2 Connectors. • 1 Screws Sensor ■ Preparations 1) Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2. Round Shape 2) Remove the Right Lower Cover.(Refer to page 4-193) Terminal...
  • Page 518 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Transparency/Registration/Vertical Path Sensor > Procedure 4-198 8) Open the Edge Saddle, and remove the Vertical Path Sensor. (4 Claws, 1 Connector) NOTE: In the following procedure, remove only sensors that require replacement. Edge Saddle Connector Vertical Path Sensor...

  • Page 519: Removing The Cassette Right Upper Cover

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover 4-199 Removing the Cassette Right Upper Cover 2) Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover. 3) Lift the Lower Guide and remove the arm. NOTE: • If the Cassette Pedestal is connected, perform step 1-1).

  • Page 520: Removing The Cassette 2 Pickup Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit > Procedure 4-200 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 2) Remove the Pickup Harness. • 1 wire saddle ■ Preparations • 1 edge saddle • 2 connectors 1) Pull the Cassette1 and Cassette2.

  • Page 521: Removing The Cassette Size Detection Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure 4-201 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit ■ Preparations 1) Remove the Cassette. 2) W hen removing the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit.(Refer to page 4-196) 3) When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit.(Refer to page 4-200)

  • Page 522: Removing The Reader Adf Unit

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Option > Removing the Reader ADF Unit > Procedure 4-202 Option 6) Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable. • 2 Connectors • 2 Wire Saddles Removing the Reader ADF Unit • 1 Cable Guide ■ Procedure Reader 1) Execute service mode >...
  • Page 523 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Option > Removing the Reader ADF Unit > Procedure 4-203 9) Install the Scanner System Fixation Screws that have been kept in a safe place since 11) Release the fixation on the left side of the Reader Unit. installation.
  • Page 524 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Option > Removing the Reader ADF Unit > Procedure 4-204 13) Remove the 2 Reader Mounting Plates on the right side of the Reader Unit. • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x8) F-4-405 14) Lift the Reader Unit with 2 or more people and remove it. CAUTION: How to hold the Reader Unit When lifting the Reader Unit, be sure to work with 2 or more people.

  • Page 525: Data To Be Handled By Sram

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-205 Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Part to be Description Procedure When TPM is...
  • Page 526 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-206 ● Items which needs to be backed up by the user when replacing the Part to be Description Procedure...
  • Page 527 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Data to be handled by SRAM(with HDD Encryption Board > The kind of data to handle > Handling SRAM data of this machine 4-207 ● Using SST enables the following: SST has the following functions that are necessary for service work: 1.

  • Page 528: Adjustment

    Adjustment ■ Main Controller ■ Image Formation System ■ Pickup Feed System Adjustment...

  • Page 529: Hdd

    Adjustment > Main Controller > HDD Main Controller Aftter 1) Format the HDD. Replacement 1-1) Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main power switch while simultaneously pressing 2+8 keys). 1-2) Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST. 2) Download the system software 2-1) Download the system software (system/LANG/RUI, etc.) using SST.

  • Page 530: Main Controller Pcb 1

    Adjustment > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB 2 Points to note Use of an HDD in which the system software of another machine (a machine of when using a different serial number) is installed for a troubleshooting is possible if it is an an HDD with HDD of a model of iR-ADV C5255 series and later.

  • Page 531: Dc Controller Pcb

    Adjustment > Main Controller > Control Panel CPU PCB/LCD Panel DC controller PCB Aftter When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an USB memory device: Replacement 1) After replacing the PCB, start the machine by 2+8 startup. 2)Connect the USB memory device to USB I/F (Host) of the machine. How to Replace Refer to “Removing the DC Controller PCB”.

  • Page 532: Image Formation System

    Adjustment > Image Formation System > ITB Image Formation System How to Replace Refer to “Removing the ITB”. Developing Assembly the Parts Adjustment Execute the user mode (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Procedure Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation). Adjustment Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it procedure differs depending on the color.

  • Page 533: Itb Alignment Adjustment

    Adjustment > Image Formation System > ITB Alignment Adjustment ITB Alignment Adjustment Adjustment ■ Procedure Procedure 1) Put markings as shown in the figure below to use as the reference when correcting the position. Adjustment Execute the user mode (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Procedure Image Quality >...

  • Page 534: Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

    Adjustment > Image Formation System > Hopper Unit Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Adjustment ● When the values are below -350 Procedure Move the ITB Motor Support Plate down. Moving it by 1 mm changes the values of ITB-POS and ITB-POS2 by approx. 200. How to Replace Refer to “Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and Secondary Transfer After adjustment, check that the values of COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>ITB-POS...

  • Page 535: Pickup Feed System

    Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Pre-secondary Transfer Guide Adjustment Pickup Feed System • When the right side of image is distorted Move the front side of the guide toward the inside of the machine. Geometric Characteristics Adjustment Loosen Geometric characteristics adjustment is executed when image distortion (on the entire image and the trailing edge only) occurs.
  • Page 536 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment ■ Registration Roller Pressure Adjustment • When the left side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Turn the screw counterclockwise. Adjustment is possible by turning the screw located as shown in the figure below. Check the position of the Adjustment Plate before adjustment.
  • Page 537 Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Geometric Characteristics Adjustment > Fixing Alignment Adjustment 5-10 ■ Fixing Alignment Adjustment • When the right side of the trailing edge of image is distorted Move the Adjustment Plate up. Adjustment is possible by loosening the screw located as shown in the figure below and moving the Adjustment Plate up and down.

  • Page 538: Amethod Of Setting 8K And 16K (Chinese Paper)

    Adjustment > Pickup Feed System > Method of Setting Special Paper 5-11 aMethod of Setting 8K and 16K (Chinese Paper) Method of Setting Special Paper 1) Set the original detection size to AB configuration.r • Service mode (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL-SZ = 0 COPIER >...

  • Page 539: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting ■ Initial Check ■ Test Print ■ Troubleshooting items ■ Version upgrade ■ Startup System Failure Diagnosis ■ Controller Self Diagnosis ■ Debug log ■ Embedded RDS Troubleshooting...

  • Page 540: Initial Check Items List

    Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list Initial Check Initial check items list Item Detail Check Site Environment The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.

  • Page 541: Test Print

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview > Steps to select the test print TYPE Test Print Overview This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following image check items with each test print. If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.

  • Page 542: How To Use The Test Print

    Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full half tone (TYPE=5) How to use the test print ■ 16 gradations (TYPE=4) This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear. Check item Check method Assumed cause...
  • Page 543 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10) ■ Grid (TYPE=6) This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy. Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of...
  • Page 544 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to use the test print > Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14) ■ 64-gradations (TYPE=12) This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time. Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced.

  • Page 545: Troubleshooting Items

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure Troubleshooting items Image Faults ■ Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure Troubleshooting items list Category Item Reference Image Displacement/blur/ Foggy image due to charge failure p.
  • Page 546 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > 35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration ● In Case that Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper" ■ 35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration 1) Target current setting of discharge current control (COPIER >...
  • Page 547 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge ■ The 35-mm uneven image density due to the periodic deflection ■ Uneven Image Density at 94 mm of Paper Leading Edge of the developing cylinder About 95mm F-6-10...
  • Page 548 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Missing color due to the laser exposure failure 6-10 ● In case that the Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper 1" [Remedy] When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following procedures. Setting of the ITOP temperature in the plain paper 1 (COPIER >...
  • Page 549 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Missing color due to the laser exposure failure 6-11 5) Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of upper. Paper F-6-14 6-11 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Missing color due to the laser exposure failure...
  • Page 550 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer 6-12 ■ Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "+10" after checking the sub-item name corresponding to XXXX from the following table. If not improved, please increase the setting value by +10 each.
  • Page 551 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide 6-13 ■ Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide F-6-16 [Location] Fixing Inlet Guide [Cause] When making 2-sided copies of solid image continuously in high temperature & high humidity environment, rib side on the Fixing Inlet Guide is deteriorated and resin part may be scraped.
  • Page 552 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide 6-14 ■ Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide Separation Guide Cleaning Area 約120mm F-6-18 F-6-19 [Location] Leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide...

  • Page 553: Operation Error

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Noise around the Fixing Film Unit 6-15 Operation Error 3) While pushing the Fixing Film area with lint-free paper, move it right and left 2 times. ■ Noise around the Fixing Film Unit [Location] Fixing Film Unit [Cause]...
  • Page 554 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Operation Error > Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2) mode < Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stit 6-16 ■ Cannot close the Process Unit ■ Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2) mode <...

  • Page 555: Error Code

    Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E732-0001: Scanner communication error 6-17 Error Code [Related parts] • Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (J3003) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/ ■ E732-0001: Scanner communication error J109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) •...
  • Page 556 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E732-0021/0022: Scanner communication error 6-18 ■ E732-0021/0022: Scanner communication error [Related parts] • Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (J3003) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/ [Description] J109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 •...
  • Page 557 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E732-0023: Scanner communication error 6-19 ■ E732-0023: Scanner communication error [Related parts 1: Communication] • Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (J3003) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/ [Description] J109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 •...
  • Page 558 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E732-8888: ADF detection error 6-20 ■ E732-8888: ADF detection error [Description] ADF which was different from the one set in service mode was detected. [Remedy] Start remedy for error at installation Check the setting of the following service mode: COPIER>...
  • Page 559 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E733-0000: Printer communication error 6-21 ■ E733-0000: Printer communication error [Related parts 1: Communication] • Harness between the Riser PCB (J102) and the DC Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of [Description] replacement: Flat Cable) A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was •...
  • Page 560 Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Error Code > E733-0001/0002: Printer communication error 6-22 ■ E733-0001/0002: Printer communication error [Related parts] • Harness between the Riser PCB (J102) and the DC Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of [Description] replacement: Flat Cable) A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was •...

  • Page 561: Version Upgrade

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade 6-23 Version upgrade Overview ■ Overview of Version Upgrade The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software. ● Downloading System Software This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
  • Page 562 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software 6-24 ■ Writing System Software The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space. After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine. In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started.
  • Page 563 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software 6-25 version up... error massage Error massage F-6-30 6-25 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software...
  • Page 564 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode 6-26 ■ Download Mode When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with other iR-series models.
  • Page 565 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components 6-27 ■ System Software Components The table below shows the system software components for this machine. Software to be upgraded Display on SST How to upgrade versions Remarks Registered name Name of system SST USB memory Others of product...
  • Page 566 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process 6-28 ■ Note on Download Process CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process. Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on. If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).

  • Page 567: Version Upgrade Via Sst

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview 6-29 Version Upgrade via SST ● Downloading System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST. ■ Overview Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
  • Page 568 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software 6-30 ■ Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. ● System CD to SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST. NOTE: The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
  • Page 569 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-31 7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button. ■ Connection The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode. •...
  • Page 570 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection 6-32 4) Check the IP address of the PC. Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt. Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC. If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network settings of the PC.
  • Page 571 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 6-33 ■ Downloading System Software (Assist mode) NOTE: If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode, 1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD).
  • Page 572 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-34 ■ Downloading System Software (Single mode) NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes. The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system software can be downloaded similarly).
  • Page 573 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-35 NOTE: NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen. Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes. •...
  • Page 574 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode) 6-36 6) Click “Shutdown / Restart” button. NOTE: If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM. 1) Click “Clear”...
  • Page 575 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-37 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format ALL When executing format BOOTDEV startup in normal mode ● Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting. •...
  • Page 576 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-38 ● Steps of Formatting When executing format ALL startup in normal mode 1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
  • Page 577 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-39 5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start". 7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See the steps to download the system software for details. F-6-50 6) Click "Execute Format"...
  • Page 578 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD 6-40 ● Mounting New HDD When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure. Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially.
  • Page 579 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-41 ■ Backup NOTE: Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. ● Overview The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader Controller PCB.
  • Page 580 CAUTION: 2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST. • When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click “Start”.
  • Page 581 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup 6-43 5) Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button. ● Steps to Download Data CAUTION: • The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded •...

  • Page 582: Version Upgrade Using Usb Memory Storage Device

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device 6-44 Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device 4) Click “Download Data” button. ■ Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device.
  • Page 583 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-45 ● Downloading System Software ■ Copying System Software Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. ● System CD to SST Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
  • Page 584 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-46 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button. 7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button. F-6-67 6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the F-6-69...
  • Page 585 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-47 ● SST to USB memory Storage Device 4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen. Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. Preparation Requirements: •...
  • Page 586 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software 6-48 6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version). NOTE: When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded.
  • Page 587 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection 6-49 ■ Connection 3) Switch to the download mode to use. • In the case of normal mode (Recommended) Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; CAUTION: and then press [OK].
  • Page 588 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-50 ■ Upgrading System Software Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions. ● Menu/Function Overview [[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------- [1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
  • Page 589 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software 6-51 ● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software CAUTION: Note when the power is turned OFF Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode. NOTE: The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the...
  • Page 590 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 6-52 ■ Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen. ●...
  • Page 591 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-53 ■ Downloading System Software (Confirmation) ● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
  • Page 592 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation) 6-54 Operation procedure 1) Enter download mode. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [2] ->...
  • Page 593 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting) 6-55 ■ Downloading System Software (Overwriting) CAUTION: ● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well.
  • Page 594 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-56 ■ Formatting HDD When executing format ALL When executing format BOOTDEV startup in normal mode ● HDD Format Overview Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine: •...
  • Page 595 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD 6-57 ● [4]: Format HDD 4) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
  • Page 596 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2 6-58 ■ Backup 1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the “Reset” key to execute shutdown sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears. ●...

  • Page 597: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001 6-59 Troubleshooting ■ Other Menu ● [9]: Other Menu ■ Error Code: E753-0001 This mode displays other menu. ● Cause In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing Operation procedure the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753- 1) Enter download mode.

  • Page 598: Version Upgrade Via Cds

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview 6-60 Version Upgrade via CDS ■ Overview Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the following 3 methods are available using Updater functions. a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) b.
  • Page 599 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-61 ■ Preparation • For Install of Application Enabling [Install Application/ ● Overview of Preparation Installation Method Network Settings Options] Button of User Mode The following should be prepared before using Updater. LMS-linked Installation •...
  • Page 600 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-62 ● Network Settings 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 1.Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method. Refer to user manual of the device for details. NOTE: •...
  • Page 601 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-63 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the Note: [Delivery Server URL] button. For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] L-CDS.
  • Page 602 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-64 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Yes] button. F-6-102 Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server F-6-100 (to execute the communication test to the distribution server). 4.
  • Page 603 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation 6-65 ● Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW- linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link. Setting of Device COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW Service Mode...
  • Page 604 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-66 ■ a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) ■ b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”. See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”.
  • Page 605 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-67 2. Press [Updater] button. 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. F-6-106 F-6-108 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. F-6-107 6-67 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
  • Page 606 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update) 6-68 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. CAUTION: [Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function] • Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating.
  • Page 607 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-69 ■ c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. Mode) The figure below shows the operational flow of “Manual Download and Update”. STEP 1 STEP 2 Download using...
  • Page 608 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-70 5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button. F-6-114 •...
  • Page 609 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-71 7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. [E-mail]: E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here. Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
  • Page 610 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-72 8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and button.
  • Page 611 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-73 STEP 2: Update using Updater 3. Press [Update Firmware] button. The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions. When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is updated automatically.
  • Page 612 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) 6-74 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 1).
  • Page 613 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 6-75 ■ Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button. This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.
  • Page 614 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 6-76 ■ Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button. This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2.
  • Page 615 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-77 3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version]. ■ Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater. Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
  • Page 616 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware 6-78 4. Press [Delete Firmware] button. F-6-132 5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button. F-6-133 6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted.
  • Page 617 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation 6-79 ■ Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation No.2 Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions. No.1 Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like. Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater.
  • Page 618 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports 6-80 ■ Information required for Reports Cause: The network between the updater and the CDS server has stopped. ● Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site Remedy: Conduct a communication test and check the state of network.
  • Page 619 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs 6-81 ■ Debug Logs NOTE: • See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 2 for details of changing Log Level ● Obtaining Log Files Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI. This procedure is shown below.
  • Page 620 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-82 ■ Error Messages Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with the...
  • Page 621 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-83 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Server : Connect Failed Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job. File Server : Retrieve Failed (communication test result delivery server.
  • Page 622 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-84 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new Check if the log file exceeded the max value. Error Code: [xxx] (main screen) log was not accepted.
  • Page 623 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-85 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. UGW linkage (main UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the Error Code: [xxx] screen) UGW linkage.
  • Page 624 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-86 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy An error occurred. Check the Update UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Firmware screen.
  • Page 625 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages 6-87 Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, Error Code: [xxx] Firmware screen) to the server.

  • Page 626: Error Code

    Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > How to read an error code 6-88 Error Code The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes. ■...
  • Page 627 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed 6-89 ■ List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed In the list shown below, error codes which are likely to be displayed are classified into two groups: •...
  • Page 628 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed 6-90 Error Description Remedy Code (hex number) 8108100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware. 8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule information was checked with CDS.
  • Page 629 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed 6-91 Error Description Remedy Code (hex number) 82095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment. 82095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.
  • Page 630 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed 6-92 Error Description Remedy Code (hex number) 85005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 85005300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
  • Page 631 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-93 ■ Error Code The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Support Group in the sales company. Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy...
  • Page 632 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-94 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 633 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-95 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 634 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-96 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 635 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-97 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 636 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-98 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 637 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-99 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 638 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-100 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 639 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-101 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 640 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-102 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 641 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-103 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 642 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Code 6-104 Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th Local CDS file Network digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery...
  • Page 643 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function 6-105 ■ Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error The first...
  • Page 644 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Error Code > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them 6-106 ■ Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them ● Scenes Where an Error Occurs When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred.

  • Page 645: Startup System Failure Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Useful Operations 6-107 Startup System Failure Diagnosis The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis The goal of the startup system failure diagnosis is to be able to solve troubles associated with a Control Panel display failure by performing the following steps.

  • Page 646: Startup Failure Analysis Policy

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Startup Failure Analysis Policy 6-108 Startup Failure Analysis Policy Structure overview of each flow Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure Startup Failure Analysis Policy describes troubleshooting related to "Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure"...

  • Page 647: Flow A: Execution Flow For Control Panel Startup Failure

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check 6-109 Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup The Control Panel does not display Failure Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF ■...
  • Page 648 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check 6-110 ● Check item Item Check item Location (4a) Main Controller Item Check item Location PCB1: LED9 Control Panel Main Controller PCB2: LED4 Main Controller PCB1: LED9...

  • Page 649: Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow 6-111 Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow ● Check item Item Check item Location ● Control Panel 12V Check Flow Control Panel CPU PCB Start C1005 (12V) Check the 12V input to the Control...
  • Page 650 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow 6-112 Item Check item Location Item Check item Location Disconnect and Relay PCB Disconnect and then connect the 12V then connect J427 Connector of the Control Panel the 12V Power Supply Connector of...
  • Page 651 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow 6-113 Item Check item Location Relay PCB J427 J427 Control Panel CPU PCB J1002 J1002 Check the cables between J427 of the Relay PCB and J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB. 1.

  • Page 652: Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check 6-114 Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow - Check whether the Main Controller 1 and Main Controller 2 are connected properly to the Riser PCB. ■...
  • Page 653 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check 6-115 ● Check item Item Check item Location Remove Item Check item Location the Main Check Controller 2 the Main Controller 1 LED 9 activation Check the Main...

  • Page 654: Flow D: All-Night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check 6-116 Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow Identify the cause in the following flow: ■ Status Check The All-night Power Supply (3.3V) is not supplied to the Main Controllers.
  • Page 655 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check 6-117 ● Check item Item Check item Location AC driver PCB Item Check item Location AC driver PCB Relay PCB J413 AC driver PCB Check the pins J1014 1 and 2 (yellow)

  • Page 656: Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles 6-118 Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow ● Check item Check the output from the 12V Power Supply ■ Status Check Item Check item Location 12V Power...
  • Page 657 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles 6-119 Check the output from the AC Power Supply Item Check item Location Relay PCB Item Check item Location J421 AC driver pins 5 - pins Normal...
  • Page 658 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles 6-120 Item Check item Location J401 J411 J431 5 - 3 J411 J401 J431 J431 J401 Check cable from the triangle mark. - J401: Eighth cable - J431: Fifth cable Check whether the cables are trapped...

  • Page 659: Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow > Status Check 6-121 Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow ● Check item 1. If the problem remains unsolved even after checking the short circuit of the harnesses, ■ Status Check disconnect the following connector one by one and repeat the following procedure to check whether the symptoms change.

  • Page 660: Reference: Activation Conditions Of The Control Panel Backlight

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight 6-122 Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight ● Description Following are the details of conditions when the Control Panel Backlight is activated: ● Field Remedy The Control Panel Backlight is turned ON when 12V power is supplied from the Relay PCB.

  • Page 661: Flow G: Execution Flow Of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow G: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Check item 6-123 Flow G: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure ■ Check item Diagnosis Startup Method 1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' ■...

  • Page 662: Procedure A: Detailed Procedure Of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 6-124 Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 1. Perform the following checks if the failure diagnosis does not start. If it starts, proceed to the next step.

  • Page 663: Controller Self Diagnosis

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview 6-125 Controller Self Diagnosis ■ Overview Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations shown below. Controller Self Diagnosis DC Controller PCB ■ Introduction Reader Option Operation of the error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for errors are...
  • Page 664 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview 6-126 ● Layout Drawing Main Controller PCB 1 Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis SDRAM F-6-155 Main Controller PCB 2 F-6-154 6-126 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview...
  • Page 665 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart 6-127 ■ Basic Flowchart Basic Check Items Check all of the items shown below. DDR2 -SDRAM (M0) Turn O N the m ain power s witc h. DDR2 -SDRAM Does the Power (M1)
  • Page 666 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-128 ■ Controller System Error Diagnosis 2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel. ● Boot Method 1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’...
  • Page 667 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-129 ● Diagnosis Time <How to view the error result> The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above. Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes. Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
  • Page 668 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-130 <Controller System Error Diagnosis Table> Test Description Assumed Error Remedy Error The error locations are identified according to the following table. Name Location Code SN-11 RTC Check failure of RTC •...
  • Page 669 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-131 Display HDD S.M.A.R.T Test Description Assumed Error Remedy Error Name Location Code SN-20 Check failure between • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the E355 FRAM the Main Controller...
  • Page 670 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis 6-132 Note: Correspondence at the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit use. The SMART contents are diagnosis results of the master HDD. In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.

  • Page 671: Operation Check Of The Main Controller Leds

    Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2 6-133 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■ Checking■the■lighting■of■the■LED4■RED■on■the■Main■Controller■2■ ■ You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.
  • Page 672 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 6-134 ■ Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 •...

  • Page 673: Debug Log

    * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and DC Controller SUBLOG_DCON the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up. T-6-34 ● Collection of Logs Connect SST or a USB memory device, and select COPIER >...

  • Page 674: Collecting System Information

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) 6-136 ■ Description of Log to be Collected ■ Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device) When operation from the Control Panel or an event log (exceptional operation, error code, or NOTE: reboot) occurs, the number of logs increases.
  • Page 675 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-137 ● When the data is sent to the USB memory device ■ Uploading Data by SST A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver.
  • Page 676 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-138 2. Press the Upload Data button. 4. Press the "Save" button. F-6-175 F-6-177 3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button. 5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button. When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
  • Page 677 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions: 6-139 6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC. In the initial setting: Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) > 20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm) F-6-179 6-139 Troubleshooting >...

  • Page 678: When To Obtain Logs

    ● Preconditions When the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up determines the need for an SUBLOG00_0014_0515204388.Z analysis of debug log by the R&D department, log collection is requested via sales company HQ.
  • Page 679 Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs 6-141 NOTE: • If the obtained log file name contains "SHT", it means that the log was recorded at the time of shutdown. Example: SUBLOG00_0001_0918140788SHT.TXT When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if the performed operations include turning OFF the power, use the file name "SHT"...

  • Page 680: Network Packet Capture

    Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection 6-142 Network Packet Capture ● Overall flow 1) Enable network capture ■ Overview 2) Start the network capture function 3) Overwrite function The network capture function is an embedded function of the machine.The network data 4) Encryption function sent to and received from the machine can be collected (captured) without using any special 5) Start/stop network capture...
  • Page 681 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection 6-143 ● Start the network capture function The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full. When the overwriting setting is ON Select the following: Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > "1". •...
  • Page 682 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection 6-144 ● Start/stop network capture 1) Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > STT-STP > 1. 2) To stop capturing, set "0". F-6-185 Note: When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and...
  • Page 683 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions 6-145 ■ Other functions Caution: ● Payload discard function Be sure to stop the network capture function after collecting network packet capture data. Payload is customer data. Data is collected including payload by default. To prevent leak of customers' information or large volume of network packet, the network packet can be collected while payload is discarded.
  • Page 684 • It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software, such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
  • Page 685 3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap). Note: When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc. F-6-194 6-147 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection...
  • Page 686 • It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software, such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
  • Page 687 3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap). Note: When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc. 6-149 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection...

  • Page 688: Embedded Rds Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting > Embedded RDS Troubleshooting 6-150 Embedded RDS Troubleshooting No.1 Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG! Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete. Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below. 1) Check network connections Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON? YES: Proceed to Step 2).
  • Page 689 Troubleshooting > Embedded RDS Troubleshooting 6-151 (b) Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it. Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication log (COM-LOG) 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the right side.
  • Page 690 Troubleshooting > Embedded RDS Troubleshooting 6-152 3) When each line is selected, the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown No.3 in the figure below. (Example: No. 05) Symptom: Registration information of the E-RDS machine was deleted from the device information on Web Portal, and then registered again.
  • Page 691 Troubleshooting > Embedded RDS Troubleshooting 6-153 No.8 No.11 Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is grayed Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs. out. Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM- TEST was executed again.

  • Page 692: Error•Jam•Alarm

    Error•Jam•Alarm ■ Overview ■ Error Code ■ Jam Code ■ Alarm Code Error•Jam•Alarm...

  • Page 693: Outline

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Overview > Outline > Pickup size Overview ■ Pickup position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. Outline Pickup position Pickup position code ■ Outline At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.) This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the Cassette 1...
  • Page 694 Error•Jam•Alarm > Overview > Outline > Reorganization of E602 Detail Code ■ Points to Note When Clearing HDD Display Paper Size Display Paper Size I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI...

  • Page 695: Error Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Error Code Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area E001 0003 Title High temperature error detected by hardware Error Code Details Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the Thermistor (Main Thermistor 1: 264 deg C, Main Thermistor 2: 265 deg C, Sub Thermistor 1, 2: 280 deg C) Detailed Occurance...
  • Page 696 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E003 0001 Title Abnormal detection during paper feeding E004 0000 Title Thermistor disconnection detection error Description During print control, Sub Thermistor detects 70 deg C or Description Signal name, FUSER_CNCTX, detects disconnection for less from the target temperature for 5 sec.
  • Page 697 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E009 0002 Title Pressure error (it is highly possible that grease is E012 0103 Title Faulty signal with Y drum encoder sensor 2 scattered on the surface of the cam.) Description The signal was not detected for 100 msec or more.
  • Page 698 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E012 0201 Title M Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error E012 0205 Title Failure in M Drum Motor Control Description M Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error (It was detected Description Unstable rotation of the M Drum Motor that the motor was rotating, but not the encoders.)
  • Page 699 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E012 0303 Title Faulty signal with C drum encoder sensor 2 E012 0401 Title Bk Drum Encoder 1 and 2 signal error Description The signal was not detected for 100 msec or more.
  • Page 700 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E012 0405 Title Failure in Bk Drum Motor Control E012 2000 Title Failure in rotation of Drum Motors (in all colors) and ITB Motor Description Unstable rotation of the Bk Drum Motor Description Faulty rotation with all of the Motors at the same time...
  • Page 701 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-10 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 0011 Title Error in Y Developing Assembly E020 0014 Title Error in Bk Developing Assembly Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the patch level was minimized at the time of patch the patch level was minimized at the time of patch...
  • Page 702 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-11 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 0023 Title Error in C Developing Assembly E020 0102 Title Error in M Developing Assembly Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch.
  • Page 703 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-12 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 0140 Title Error in Y Developing Assembly E020 01B1 Title Error in Y Developing Assembly Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR Description TD ratio upper limit error at the time of print sequence initialization: less than the specified value (3.2V).
  • Page 704 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-13 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 0202 Title Error in M Developing Assembly E020 0204 Title Error in Bk Developing Assembly Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch. Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
  • Page 705 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-14 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 0290 Title Error in M Developing Assembly E020 0331 Title Error in C Developing Assembly Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected Description The average of ATR reference value was higher than the value specified value at the time of ATR Sensor initialization.
  • Page 706 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-15 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E020 03B0 Title Error in C Developing Assembly E020 0441 Title Error in Bk Developing Assembly Description TD ratio lower limit error at the time of print sequence Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR (Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly) initialization: exceeds the specified value (6.8V).
  • Page 707 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-16 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E021 0100 Title Error in Y Developing Motor E021 0400 Title Error in Bk Developing Motor Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed. Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
  • Page 708 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-17 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 0110 Title Timeout error in detection of Y Toner Bottle Seal/Release E025 01A0 Title Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5) Sensor Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON =>...
  • Page 709 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-18 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 01B0 Title Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5) E025 01C0 Title Error in Cover Sensor (PS13) in Y Toner Container Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner HP Sensor status (OFF ->...
  • Page 710 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-19 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 0200 Title Error in lock of the M Toner Container Motor E025 0210 Title Timeout error in detection of M Toner Bottle Seal/Release Sensor Description The M Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock detection.
  • Page 711 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-20 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 02A0 Title Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6) E025 02B0 Title Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6) Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status (ON ->...
  • Page 712 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-21 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 02C0 Title Error in Cover Sensor (PS14) in M Toner Container E025 0300 Title Error in lock of the C Toner Container Motor Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Description The C Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / Cover when removing the Toner Container.
  • Page 713 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-22 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 0310 Title Timeout error in detection of C Toner Bottle Seal/Release E025 03A0 Title Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7) Sensor Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON =>...
  • Page 714 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-23 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 03B0 Title Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7) E025 03C0 Title Error in Cover Sensor (PS15) in C Toner Container Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner HP Sensor status (OFF ->...
  • Page 715 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-24 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 0400 Title Error in lock of the Bk Toner Container Motor E025 0410 Title Timeout error in detection of Bk Toner Bottle Seal/Release Sensor Description The Bk Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock detection.
  • Page 716 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-25 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 04A0 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8) E025 04B0 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8) Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam Description Unable to detect the change in the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor status (ON ->...
  • Page 717 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-26 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E025 04C0 Title Error in Cover Sensor (PS16) in Bk Toner Container E027 0100 Title Error in supply with Y Developing Assembly Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Container Inner Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON =>...
  • Page 718 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-27 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E027 0300 Title Error in supply with C Developing Assembly E029 0003 Title ITB light intensity error Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON =>...
  • Page 719 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-28 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E061 01F0 Title Abnormal current run to the Y Drum E061 01E0 Title Abnormal current run to the M Drum Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of Description The change in current level for M Drum film thickness the Y Drum film thickness (large current level)
  • Page 720 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-29 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E061 0201 Title Abnormal current run to the C Drum E061 03F1 Title Abnormal current run to the C Drum Description Abnormal current run to the C Drum (small current level Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of or no drum is found)
  • Page 721 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-30 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E061 04F0 Title Abnormal current run to the Bk Drum E074 0003 Title Error in Sensor Description Abnormal initial current level at the time of initialization of Description Both Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2 the Bk Drum film thickness (large current level) (PS22,PS23) are detected at the time of engagement/...
  • Page 722 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-31 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E075 0004 Title Error in combination of ITB Displacement Sensors E075 0103 Title Error in full displacement of ITB (front) Description Failed to determine position due to combination of the ITB Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement Displacement Sensors (PS25 - PS28) (faulty sensor)
  • Page 723 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-32 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E102 0101 Title Faulty EEPROM of YM-side Scanner E112 0001 Title Error in Dustproof Shutter Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM in the Laser Description Failure to be back to the HP although the specified period Driver (YM) or in the case of a wrong Laser Scanner Unit of time has passed when closing.
  • Page 724 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-33 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E197 0080 Title Timeout error in EHOB transmission-waiting E197 0102 Title Error in communication of HOB single-shot mode Description Communication failure between the DC Controller PCB Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC (UN1) and Laser Scanner Unit.
  • Page 725 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-34 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E197 0201 Title Error in communication of HOB single-shot mode E197 1001 Title Feed Driver PCB disconnection Description Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC Description Feed Driver PCB disconnection detection Controller PCB (UN1).
  • Page 726 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-35 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E202 0001 Title Scanner HP error E202 0102 Title Back Side Scanning Glass HP error (This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only) Description Scanner Unit error when moving to the left side for HP check operation...
  • Page 727 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-36 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E227 0004 Title Power supply (24V) error E240 0000 Title Error in communication data Description 24V port error when loading Description When communication data error between the controller and DC Controller PCB is detected.
  • Page 728 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-37 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E248 0002 Title EEPROM error E270 0101 Title Scanner Unit (Paper Back) VSYNC signal error (This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only) Description Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller PCB (PCB1) Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB (Paper...
  • Page 729 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-38 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E280 0101 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB E301 0002 Title Reading light intensity error and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (This error occurs on Description The light intensity was at the reference level or below at Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only) paper back shading.
  • Page 730 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-39 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E302 0101 Title Error in paper back white shading E350 0002 Title System error Description Error in shading RAM access Description System error The shading value is out of the specified range.
  • Page 731 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-40 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E400 0002 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB E401 0001 Title Pickup error and DF Unit Description Pickup Unit is not returned to the home position.
  • Page 732 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-41 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E413 0001 Title DF Disengagement Motor error E423 0002 Title DF Unit SDRAM error (This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only) Description Lead Roller 1 disengagement error Description SDRAM Verify error...
  • Page 733 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-42 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E505 0002 Title EEPROM error E519 8001 Title Gear change home position error Description The checksum for the punch controller EEPROM data Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn has an error.
  • Page 734 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-43 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E530 8002 Title Front aligning plate home position error E532 0002 Title STP Move Motor fails to move from HP Description The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified home position sensor when the alignment plate front...
  • Page 735 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-44 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E535 8002 Title Swing home position error E540 0005 Title Tray Lift Motor clock error Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position Description At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
  • Page 736 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-45 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E540 8004 Title The tray 1 shift motor clock error E542 0001 Title Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
  • Page 737 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-46 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E542 8002 Title Tray 2 shift area error E542 8007 Title The tray 2 shift motor error Description The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper...
  • Page 738 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-47 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E56F 0002 Title Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to return E575 0001 Title Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP to HP Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified...
  • Page 739 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-48 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E590 8001 Title Punch home position error E592 8001 Title Trailing edge sensor error Description The puncher does not detect the punch home position Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for 20 when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor...
  • Page 740 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-49 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E592 8006 Title Horizontal registration sensor 2 error E593 8001 Title Horizontal registration home position error Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home...
  • Page 741 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-50 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E5F1 8001 Title Paper folding motor lock error E5F3 8002 Title Aligning plate home position error Description The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec Description The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn or less.
  • Page 742 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-51 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E5F6 8001 Title Paper pushing plate home position error E5F6 8005 Title Pushing position error Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor...
  • Page 743 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-52 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0001 Title Error in HDD E602 0003 Title Error in HDD Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition (BOOTDEV) Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice failed to be found at startup.
  • Page 744 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-53 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0006 Title Error in HDD E602 0010 Error in HDD Description There is no system for the sub CPU There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files Remedy Reinstall the system software.
  • Page 745 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-54 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0101 Title Error in HDD E602 0111 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after startup) startup)
  • Page 746 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-55 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0201 Title Error in HDD E602 0211 Title Error in HDD Description Error in management data area of image (at startup) Description Error in management data area of image (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 747 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-56 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0301 Title Error in HDD E602 0311 Title Error in HDD Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup) Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy...
  • Page 748 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-57 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0401 Title Error in HDD E602 0411 Title Error in HDD Description Error in thumbnail area (at startup) Description Error in thumbnail area (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 749 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-58 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0501 Title Error in HDD E602 0511 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (at startup) Description Error in storage area of universal data (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 750 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-59 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0601 Title Error in HDD E602 0611 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) startup) (after startup)
  • Page 751 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-60 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0701 Title Error in HDD E602 0711 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup) Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 752 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-61 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0801 Title Error in HDD E602 0811 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup) Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after startup) Remedy...
  • Page 753 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-62 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 0901 Title Error in HDD E602 0911 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup) Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 754 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-63 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 1011 Title Error in HDD E602 1111 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after Description Error in MEAP area (after startup) startup) Remedy...
  • Page 755 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-64 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 1201 Title Error in HDD E602 1401 Title Error in HDD Description Error in Send area (at startup) Description Error in storage area of system log (at startup) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON...
  • Page 756 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-65 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 1411 Title Error in HDD E602 1501 Title Error in HDD Description Error in storage area of system log (after startup) Description Error in Advanced Box area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 757 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-66 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 1511 Title Error in HDD E602 1601 Title Error in HDD Description Error in Advanced Box area (after startup) Description Error in CDS area (at startup) Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then...
  • Page 758 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-67 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 1611 Title Error in HDD E602 2000 Title Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board Description Error in CDS area (after startup) Description Error in combination of the controller, Encryption Board,...
  • Page 759 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-68 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E602 4000 Title Error in HDD E604 0512 Title Memory error Description OS was not found. Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Remedy 1.
  • Page 760 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-69 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E610 0202 Title There was no Encryption Board. E611 0000 Title Error code to prevent repeated retransmission at power down during fax transmission Description Error in the encryption processing part Description When the power is down during fax transmission,...
  • Page 761 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-70 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E674 0008 Title Failure in communication of FAX board E674 0200 Title Failure in communication of FAX board Description Failure in access of the port IC that is be used with Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
  • Page 762 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-71 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E710 0001 Title Error in initialization of IPC (Ctrl) E719 0001 Title Error in Coin Vendor. Description Failed to be at ready status within 3 sec after IPC chip Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor has been started.
  • Page 763 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-72 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E719 0011 Title Error in Coin Vendor. E720 0001 Title Error due to non-compatible Finisher Description Error in starting of NewCardReader Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
  • Page 764 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-73 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E731 3001 Title Error in Main Controller PCB 2 E732 0001 Title Scanner communication error Description Failure of SURF initialization. Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was detected at Remedy...
  • Page 765 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-74 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E732 0021 Title Scanner communication error E732 0022 Title Scanner communication error Description A communication error between the Reader Controller Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was detected at PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was detected at...
  • Page 766 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-75 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E732 0023 Remedy [Related parts] E732 0F01 Title Scanner communication error - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (J3003) Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot (An and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J109) (Unit of error not displayed on LUI but recorded in the error log)
  • Page 767 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-76 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E733 0000 Title Printer communication error E733 0001 Title Printer communication error Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 was detected at startup.
  • Page 768 (UURU‡-DP‡$ODUP ! (UURU &RGH ! (UURU &RGH 'HWDLOV  'HWDLOHG 2FFXUDQFH ,WHPV 'HVFULSWLRQ 'HWDLOHG 2FFXUDQFH ,WHPV 'HVFULSWLRQ FRGH FRGH DUHD FRGH FRGH DUHD (  7LWOH 3ULQWHU FRPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU ( ) 7LWOH 3ULQWHU FRPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU 'HVFULSWLRQ $ FRPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU EHWZHHQ WKH '& &RQWUROOHU 3&% 'HVFULSWLRQ &RPPXQLFDWLRQ HUURU WKDW FDQ EH UHFRYHUHG E\ UHERRW $Q DQG WKH 0DLQ &RQWUROOHU 3&%  ZDV GHWHFWHG HUURU QRW GLVSOD\HG RQ /8, EXW UHFRUGHG LQ WKH HUURU ORJ ...
  • Page 769 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-78 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E744 0002 Title Failure in language file E746 0021 Title Image Analysis Board error Description Oversized language file in HDD Description Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM) Remedy...
  • Page 770 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-79 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E746 0032 Title TPM error E747 0000 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Mismatched data in TPM Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy Format the system.
  • Page 771 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-80 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 0219 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 031B Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 772 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-81 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 051C Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 061B Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 773 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-82 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 0818 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 0919 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 774 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-83 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 0A1A Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 0B1B Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 775 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-84 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 110D Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 1202 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 776 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-85 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 1207 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 2018 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 777 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-86 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 2218 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 221D Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 778 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-87 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 3F00 Title Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P E747 620E Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy...
  • Page 779 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-88 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 621A Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 651B Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 780 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-89 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 6515 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 651D Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 781 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-90 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 6C1F Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 741F Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 782 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-91 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 7D00 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 8517 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 783 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-92 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 850F Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 951B Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 784 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-93 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E747 C51A Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 E747 C701 Title Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Description Error in Main Controller PCB2 Remedy 1.
  • Page 785 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-94 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E748 2011 Title Error in Flash PCB E748 2026 Title Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2 Description Unable to find the kernel.
  • Page 786 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-95 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E753 0001 Title Download Error E805 0001 Title Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Description System Software Update Error Description 1.
  • Page 787 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-96 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E807 0001 Title Error in Process cartridge fan (front) E880 0003 Title Error in Controller Fan Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned Description Riser PCB Fan was detected to be locked.
  • Page 788 Error•Jam•Alarm > Error Code > Error Code Details 7-97 Detailed Occurance Items Description Detailed Occurance Items Description code code area code code area E890 0001 Title Environment Sensor 2 error E996 0CA3 Title Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Description The Environment Sensor 2 detected the value higher Description Error avoidance jam (PRINTER) than the specified value.

  • Page 789: Jam Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Jam screen display specification 7-98 Jam Code Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order) Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an - Opening/closing of the door after jam error in the machine (excluding parts removal failure) was detected.
  • Page 790 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 7-99 image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/ [PS8] C5235 [PS41] [PS42] [PS39] [PS57] [PS40] [PS9] [PS43] F-7-3 [PS20] [PS6D] [PS37] [PS34] [PS2] [PS1] [PS18] F-7-4 [PS38] [PS19] [PS33] [UN51] [UN53] [PS55] [PS56] F-7-2 7-99 Error•Jam•Alarm >...
  • Page 791 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Jam Code 7-100 ■ Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code Address bit Remarks Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 010A Delay Reverse sensor PS39 P005 14 1:paper Code Address bit Remarks 020A Stationary Reverse sensor...
  • Page 792 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-101 ■ Detailed Jam Codes Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS34) Sensor Duplex Type Sensor Name Paper Sensor Address Remarks Code (PS38) 0106 Delay Fixing inlet sensor PS34 P013 1:paper Overview of detection This jam occurs when the Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS34) was not turned...
  • Page 793 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-102 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code Address Remarks Code Address Remarks 0107 Delay Inner delivery sensor PS37 P009 1:paper 0B00 Door open Right door sensor PS20 P009...
  • Page 794 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-103 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Address Remarks Code Code Address Remarks 010C Delay Duplex inlet sensor PS40 P004 1:paper 010A Delay Reverse sensor PS39 P005...
  • Page 795 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-104 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code Address Remarks Code Address Remarks 0101 Delay Cassette 1 pre- PS55 P013 1:paper 0105 Delay Registration sensor PS33 P009...
  • Page 796 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-105 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code Address Remarks Code Address Remarks 0111 Delay Baffer path entrance P030 1:paper 0103 Delay Cassette 3 pre- P017 1:paper sensor...
  • Page 797 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > image RUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 > Detailed Jam Codes 7-106 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code Address Remarks Code Address Remarks 010F Delay Deck pickup sensor PS6D P029 1:paper 0B00 Door open Front door sensor PS18 P009...

  • Page 798: Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 / Color Image Reader Unit-F1 7-107 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 / Color Image Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Reader Unit-F1 0001 delay Post-separation sensor 3 PS13 0002...

  • Page 799: Color Image Reader Unit-F1

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1 7-108 Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1 Color Image Reader Unit-F1 Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID PI123 PI105 PI108 PI107 0001 delay Timing sensor PI109 PI101 0002 Stationary Timing sensor 0042 Stationary Timing sensor (2nd sheet)
  • Page 800 Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-J1 / Booklet Finisher-J1 7-109 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code 1200 Early jam Inlet sensor PI103 110F Retry error * 1F2F Retry error * PI22 1F8F Retry error * PI16 1002 Delay jam Punch pass sensor PCB12 PI18...

  • Page 801: Inner Finisher-E1

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Jam Code > Inner Finisher-E1 7-110 Inner Finisher-E1 Type Sensor Name Sensor ID Code 1C75 Error Gripper unit HP sensor 1C71 Sensor error * Gripu arm sensor 1C20 Sensor error * Shift roller HP sensor 1C67 Sensor error * Shift roller release sensor 1C32 Sensor error * stapler move HP sensor 1C6F...

  • Page 802: Alarm Code

    Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-111 Alarm Code Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code - 0018 Toner (M) prior delivery Alarm Code alarm - 0019 Toner (C) prior delivery alarm Location Alarm Description Details - 0020 Toner (Bk) prior delivery of Trouble Code alarm...
  • Page 803 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-112 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 0011 Fixing cooling fan (front) Cause: Disconnection of the Fixing Cooling Fans - 0001 Punch dust full Operation : User message is displayed on controller (FM5) /(rear)(FM6) (FM5/6) or Failure of the Fixing Cooling Fans (FM5/6)
  • Page 804 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-113 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 9105 For R&D - B111 For R&D - 9106 For R&D - B112 For R&D - 9107 For R&D - B113 For R&D - 9108 For R&D - B114 For R&D...
  • Page 805 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-114 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 0010 For R&D - 0005 For R&D - 0011 For R&D - 0006 For R&D - 0015 Invalid BDL data Use the latest version of the printer driver for the - 0007 For R&D model.
  • Page 806 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-115 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 0302 For R&D - 0711 For R&D - 0303 For R&D - 0712 For R&D - 0304 For R&D - 0713 For R&D - 0305 For R&D - 0714 For R&D...
  • Page 807 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-116 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 0B15 For R&D - 1004 For R&D - 0C01 For R&D - 1005 For R&D - 0C02 For R&D - 1011 For R&D - 0C03 For R&D - 1012 For R&D...
  • Page 808 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-117 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 1413 For R&D - 1902 For R&D - 1414 For R&D - 1903 For R&D - 1415 For R&D - 1904 For R&D - 1501 For R&D - 1905 For R&D...
  • Page 809 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-118 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 1D11 For R&D - 2115 For R&D - 1D12 For R&D - 2201 For R&D - 1D13 For R&D - 2202 For R&D - 1D14 For R&D - 2203 For R&D...
  • Page 810 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-119 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 2604 For R&D - 2A13 For R&D - 2605 For R&D - 2A14 For R&D - 2611 For R&D - 2A15 For R&D - 2612 For R&D - 2B01 For R&D...
  • Page 811 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-120 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 2F02 For R&D - 3311 For R&D - 2F03 For R&D - 3312 For R&D - 2F04 For R&D - 3313 For R&D - 2F05 For R&D - 3314 For R&D...
  • Page 812 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-121 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 3715 For R&D - 3C04 For R&D - 3801 For R&D - 3C05 For R&D - 3802 For R&D - 3C11 For R&D - 3803 For R&D - 3C12 For R&D...
  • Page 813 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-122 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 4013 For R&D - 4502 For R&D - 4014 For R&D - 4503 For R&D - 4015 For R&D - 4504 For R&D - 4101 For R&D - 4505 For R&D...
  • Page 814 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-123 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 4911 For R&D - 4D15 For R&D - 4912 For R&D - 4E01 For R&D - 4913 For R&D - 4E02 For R&D - 4914 For R&D - 4E03 For R&D...
  • Page 815 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-124 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 5204 For R&D - 5613 For R&D - 5205 For R&D - 5614 For R&D - 5211 For R&D - 5615 For R&D - 5212 For R&D - 5701 For R&D...
  • Page 816 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-125 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 5B02 For R&D - 5F11 For R&D - 5B03 For R&D - 5F12 For R&D - 5B04 For R&D - 5F13 For R&D - 5B05 For R&D - 5F14 For R&D...
  • Page 817 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-126 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 6315 For R&D - 6804 For R&D - 6401 For R&D - 6805 For R&D - 6402 For R&D - 6811 For R&D - 6403 For R&D - 6812 For R&D...
  • Page 818 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-127 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 6C13 For R&D - 7102 For R&D - 6C14 For R&D - 7103 For R&D - 6C15 For R&D - 7104 For R&D - 6D01 For R&D - 7105 For R&D...
  • Page 819 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-128 Location Alarm Description Details Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code of Trouble Code - 7511 For R&D - 7915 For R&D - 7512 For R&D - 7A01 For R&D - 7513 For R&D - 7A02 For R&D - 7514 For R&D - 7A03 For R&D...
  • Page 820 Error•Jam•Alarm > Alarm Code > Alarm Code 7-129 Location Alarm Description Details of Trouble Code - 7E04 For R&D - 7E05 For R&D - 7E11 For R&D - 7E12 For R&D - 7E13 For R&D - 7E14 For R&D - 7E15 For R&D - 7F01 For R&D - 7F02 For R&D - 7F03 For R&D...

  • Page 821: Service Mode

    Service Mode ■ Overview ■ COPIER ■ FEEDER ■ SORTER ■ BOARD Service Mode...

  • Page 822: Points To Note When Using Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > Service Mode Menu Overview Service Mode Menu TOP Screen Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models. Points to note when using Service Mode •...

  • Page 823: Service Mode Item Explanations

    Service Mode > Overview > I/O information enhancement Service mode item explanations I/O information enhancement Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, displayed.

  • Page 824: Display Of Error Code/Alarm Code Description

    Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER >...

  • Page 825: Security Features

    Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes Security features 1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button. To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled. ■...

  • Page 826: Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

    Service Mode > Overview > Language switch Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1>...

  • Page 827: Back-Up Of Service Mode

    Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output Back-up of service mode The data output of the service data print ■ Overview In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written in the service label.
  • Page 828 Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device ■ How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device 4. Download ServicePrint. [4] ServicePrint : Transfer the report data from the machine to the USB memory device.
  • Page 829 Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST ■ How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST 4) Select 'Report', and click [Start]. Introduce it in SST Ver.4.72.

  • Page 830: Copier

    Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-10 COPIER COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MN-CONT Display of MNCON firmware version Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 ■...
  • Page 831 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-11 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION LANG-ES Display of Spanish language file version LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Spanish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file.
  • Page 832 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-12 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION OCR-CN Display of Chinese OCR: simplified TTS-ES Dis of Spanish voice dictionary version Lv.1 Details To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified). Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary.
  • Page 833 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-13 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ASR-EN Dis of English ASR dictionary version MEDIA-EL Dis of Greek media information version Lv.1 Details To display the version of English automatic speech recognition Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek media information.
  • Page 834 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-14 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION MEDIA-SL Dis of Slovenian media information ver SYSTEM Dis of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian media information. Lv.1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
  • Page 835 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-15 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-AP Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version COPY-ZH Dis COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl Lv.1 Details To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI). Lv.2 Details To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 836 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPY-NL Dis of COPY appli Dutch file version COPY-CR Dis of COPY appli Croatian file version Lv.2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA Lv.2 Details To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application UI).
  • Page 837 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-17 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-DE Dis of SEND appli German file version SEND-FI Dis of SEND appli Finnish file version Lv.1 Details To display the German language file version of SEND application Lv.2 Details To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 838 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-18 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION SEND-ID Dis of SEND appli Indonesian file ver INTRO-FR Dis of useful func intro French file ver Lv.2 Details To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file of Introduction to (JAVA UI).
  • Page 839 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-19 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-EL Dis of useful func intro Greek file ver INTRO-SL Dis useful func intro Slovenian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Features application.
  • Page 840 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-20 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION INTRO-TH Dis useful func intro Thai file version CSTMN-CS Dis of custom menu Czech file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu Features application.
  • Page 841 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-21 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION CSTMN-PT Dis of custom menu Portuguese file ver CSTMN-TK Dis of custom menu Turkish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu Lv.2 Details To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application.
  • Page 842 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-22 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-TW Dis accessibility Chinese file ver:trad ACSBT-NO Dis of accessibility Norwegian file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility Accessibility application.
  • Page 843 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-23 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ACSBT-RM Dis of accessibility Romanian file ver ERS-ES Display of ERS Spanish file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application.
  • Page 844 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-24 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ERS-NL Display of ERS Dutch file version ERS-RM Display of ERS Romanian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application.
  • Page 845 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-25 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-ZH Display of UAC Chinese file ver:smpl NLS-NO Display of UAC Norwegian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application.
  • Page 846 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-26 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION NLS-SK Display of UAC Slovak file version LANG-VN Display of Vietnamese language file ver Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
  • Page 847 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-27 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-DA Display of BOX appli Danish file version BOX-RU Dis of BOX appli Russian file version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI).
  • Page 848 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-28 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION BOX-CA Dis of BOX appli Catalan file version RPTL-DA Display of RUI portal version Lv.2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application Lv.2 Details To display the RUI portal version.
  • Page 849 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION 8-29 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION RPTL-SV Display of RUI portal version Lv.2 Details To display the RUI portal version. Use case When upgrading the firmware Display/adj/set range 00.00 to 99.99 RPTL-ID Display of RUI portal version Lv.2 Details To display the RUI portal version.
  • Page 850 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-30 ■ USER ■ ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > USER COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS SPDTYPE Dis of Ctrollr Board engine speed type FEEDER Display of DADF connection state Lv.1 Details To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. Lv.1 Details To display the connection state of DADF.
  • Page 851 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS 8-31 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Display of Network PCB connection state PCI3 Display of PCI3-connected PCB name Lv.1 Details To display the connection state of the Network PCB. Lv.1 Details To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3.
  • Page 852 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG 8-32 ■ ANALOG COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG TEMP2 Display of inside temperature COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG Lv.1 Details To display the temperature inside the machine measured by the TEMP Display of outside temperature Environment Sensor 1.
  • Page 853 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 8-33 ■ CST-STS ■ HV-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS WIDTH-MF Dis of Multi-purpose Tray ppr width size 1ATVC-Y Dis of primary transfer current (Y) Lv.2 Details To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray.
  • Page 854 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 8-34 COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS 1ATVC-K4 Dis prmry trns current(Bk): full clr mod THCK-M Display of M Drum abrasion level Lv.2 Details To display the decuple value of the current flown to the Primary Lv.1 Details To display the M Photosensitive Drum abrasion level calculated from Transfer Roller (Bk) by the primary transfer ATVC control in full color...
  • Page 855 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-35 ■ CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN-OG Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): frt COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD Lv.2 Details To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered TARGET-B Shading target value (B) bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
  • Page 856 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-36 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN-EG Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):frt LAMP2-CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): back Lv.2 Details To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered Lv.2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
  • Page 857 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD 8-37 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD GAIN2BW1 Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): Back GAIN2-OB Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): bck Lv.2 Details To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Lv.2 Details To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit Scanner Unit (paper back).
  • Page 858 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-38 ■ DPOT COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT CHG-AC-Y Display of primary charging AC bias (Y) COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT Lv.2 Details To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary 2TR-PPR Dis of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg Charging Roller (Y).
  • Page 859 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-39 COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT LPWR-C Display of laser power (C) PVCONT-C Dis of target patch contrast potntl (C) Lv.2 Details To display C laser power determined by D-max control. Lv.2 Details To display the target C patch contrast potential.
  • Page 860 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT 8-40 COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT LPGAIN-Y Dis of Y-color laser power gain value Lv.2 Details To display the gain value of Y laser power by D-max control. Use case When checking D-max control results Display/adj/set range -100 to 100 Unit...
  • Page 861 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-41 ■ DENS COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DENS-K Dis of Bk developer density change ratio COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS Lv.1 Details To display difference between Bk-color developer density and the DENS-Y Dis of Y developer density change ratio target value in % (percentage).
  • Page 862 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-42 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS D-C-TRGT Dis of ATR ctrl C patch target density SGNL-C Display of C-color developer density Lv.2 Details To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR Lv.1 Details To display the measured value of C-color developer density.
  • Page 863 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-43 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DEV-DC-C Dis of developing DC voltage (C) D-CRNT-P Dis of ATR ctrl dark current (P-wave) Lv.2 Details To display the latest C developing DC voltage Vdc. Lv.2 Details To display the dark current value (P-wave) measured at ATR control.
  • Page 864 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS 8-44 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DENS-C-H Dis of ATR ctrl C-clr TD ratio history DS-S-K-H Dis Bk-clr patch image density history Lv.2 Details To display the latest 8 C-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected by Lv.2 Details To display the latest 8 Bk-patch image density log data.
  • Page 865 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC 8-45 ■ MISC COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS DENS-K-H Dis of ATR ctrl Bk-clr TD ratio history COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC Lv.2 Details To display the latest 8 Bk-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected ENV-TR Dis of secondary transfer environment by the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
  • Page 866 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-46 ■ HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-B-M Dis of ARCDAT screen B M-color target VL COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C Lv.2 Details To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control. TGT-A-Y Dis of ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the...
  • Page 867 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-47 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-C-C Dis of ARCDAT screen C C-color target VL SUM-A-K Dis ARCDAT screen A Bk-color ctrl differ Lv.2 Details To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the...
  • Page 868 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-48 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-C-Y Dis ARCDAT screen C Y-color ctrl differ SGNL-A-C Dis ARCDAT screen A C-patch current VL Lv.2 Details To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
  • Page 869 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-49 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGNL-C-M Dis ARCDAT screen C M-patch current VL DLTA-A-K Dis of ARCDAT screen A Bk-density differ Lv.2 Details To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control. Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the...
  • Page 870 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-50 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLTA-C-Y Dis of ARCDAT screen C Y-density differ TGT-A-M2 ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the Lv.2 Details To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at current value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
  • Page 871 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-51 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-B-Y3 ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD) TGT-B-K2 ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at Lv.2 Details To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control 1/3 speed.
  • Page 872 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-52 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C TGT-C-C3 ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/3 SPD) SUM-A-K2 ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at Lv.2 Details To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control 1/3 speed.
  • Page 873 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-53 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-C-Y2 ARCDAT scrnC Y-clr ctrl differ (1/2 SPD) DLT-A-M2 ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the at 1/2 speed.
  • Page 874 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-54 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLT-B-C2 ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/2 SPD) DLT-C-K2 ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the Lv.2 Details To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
  • Page 875 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-55 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGL-B-M2 ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD) SGL-C-K2 ARCDAT scrnC Bk-patch current VL(1/2SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control Lv.2 Details To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
  • Page 876 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-56 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SUM-B-Y3 ARCDAT scrnB Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) SUM-C-M3 ARCDAT scrnC M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control Lv.2 Details To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed.
  • Page 877 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-57 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C DLT-A-C3 ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/3 SPD) DLT-B-K3 ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the Lv.2 Details To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed.
  • Page 878 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C 8-58 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C SGL-A-Y3 ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) SGL-B-C3 ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD) Lv.2 Details To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control Lv.2 Details To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/3 speed.
  • Page 879 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030) 8-59 Address Name Mark Remarks P007 Fixing heat exhaust fan 1,2 _half speed FM1,2 1:half speed ■ Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030) Fixing cooling fan (front),(rear) FM5,6 1:ON Secondary transfer exhaust fan...
  • Page 880 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030) 8-60 Address Name Mark Remarks Address Name Mark Remarks P009 P011 First & Second delivery motor 1:enable Second delivery tray full sensor PS45 0:full First delivery tray full sensor PS44 0:full First delivery sensor...
  • Page 881 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030) 8-61 Address Name Mark Remarks Address Name Mark Remarks P013 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS49 0:paper P015 Cassette 1 paper level sensor A PS51 0:paper Cassette 1 paper level sensor B PS52 0:paper Cassette 2 pickup motor...
  • Page 882 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Main Device (DCON > P004 to 030) 8-62 Address Name Mark Remarks Address Name Mark Remarks P017 Cassette 3 paper sensor 0:paper P024 Cassette 3 paper level sensor A 0:paper Cassette 3 paper level sensor B 0:paper Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor 1:paper...
  • Page 883 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Reader (RCON > P002, 005) 8-63 ■ Reader (RCON > P002, 005) Address Name Mark Remarks P028 Deck open solenoid SL2D 1:ON Address Name Mark Remarks P002 Deck lifter motor 1:ON Deck pickup clutch CL2D 1:ON Deck open solenoid...
  • Page 884 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 (RCON > P001, P006, FEEDER > P001 to 008) 8-64 ■ Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-E1 (RCON > P001, P006, Address Name Mark Remarks P003 FEEDER > P001 to 008) ●...
  • Page 885 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Color Image Reader Unit-F1 (RCON > P006, FEEDER > P001 to 007) 8-65 ■ Color Image Reader Unit-F1 (RCON > P006, FEEDER > P001 Address Name Mark Remarks P009 to 007) ● RCON Lead sensor 2 *2 1:paper Lead sensor 1*2...
  • Page 886 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Inner Finisher-E1(SORTER>P001 to P014) 8-66 ■ Inner Finisher-E1(SORTER>P001 to P014) Address Name Mark Remarks P006 Release motor 1:ON Address Name Mark Remarks P001 8-15 - Entrance sensor 0:ON1:OFF Registration clutch 1:ON Gripper unit HP sensor 0:ON1:OFF Pickup clutch 1:ON...
  • Page 887 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Inner Finisher-E1(SORTER>P001 to P014) 8-67 Address Name Mark Remarks Address Name Mark Remarks P005 8-15 - P011 8-15 - Processing tray sensor 0:nopaper1:paper Stapler safety switch 0:OFF1:ON Entrance roller release /stopper HP 0:ON1:OFF Fan2 0:OFF1:ON sensor...
  • Page 888 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007 to P031) 8-68 ■ Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007 Address bit Name Mark Remarks P012 8-15 - to P031) Swing height sensor PI123 0:CLOSE1:OPEN Gear change home position sensor PI117 0:HP Address bit Name...
  • Page 889 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007 to P031) 8-69 Address bit Name Mark Remarks Address bit Name Mark Remarks P016 8-15 - P020 8-15 - Alignment plate home position sensor 1:HP Rear aligning plate motor M104 0:CW1:CCW Rear aligning plate motor...
  • Page 890 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > Staple Finisher-J1/Booklet Finisher-J1(SORTER>P001, P007 to P031) 8-70 Address bit Name Mark Remarks Address bit Name Mark Remarks P025 8-15 - P029 8-15 - Stitcher motor (rear)_CCW 0:ON1:OFF Stitcher motor (front)_CW 0:ON1:OFF Stitcher motor (front)_CCW 0:ON1:OFF Feed motor 0:ON1:OFF...
  • Page 891 Service Mode > COPIER > IO > External 2 Hole Puncher-B2(SORTER>P013, P032 to P036, P039) 8-71 ■ External 2 Hole Puncher-B2(SORTER>P013, P032 to P036, Address Name Mark Remarks P036 8-15 - P039) Address Name Mark Remarks P013 8-15 - Side registration motor_B 1:ON Side registration motor_A 1:ON...

  • Page 892: Adjust

    Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY 8-72 ADJUST COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJ-S Adjustment of shading position ■ ADJ-XY Lv.1 Details To adjust the shading position. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the backup value. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY As the value is incremented by 1, the position moves by 0.1mm.
  • Page 893 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-73 ■ CCD COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Fine adj img ratio:book, vert scan [frt] COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Lv.1 Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical W-PLT-X White level data(X) entry of white plate scanning direction at copyboard reading.
  • Page 894 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-74 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD SH-TRGT Shading tgt VL(B&W)[Copyboard](D-Reader) DFTAR-R Shading target value (R) [Front side] Lv.1 Details To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
  • Page 895 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-75 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M1 MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front] MTF2-M5 MTF value 5 setting: horz scan [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 896 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-76 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-M9 MTF value 9 setting: horz scan [Front] MTF2-S4 MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [Front] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 897 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-77 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF2-S8 MTF value 8 setting: vert scan [Front] DFCH2R2 Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Front side] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 898 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-78 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH2G10 Complex chart No.10 data(G) [Front side] MTF-M3 MTF value 3 setting: horz scan [Back] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 899 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-79 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M7 MTF value 7 setting: horz scan [Back] MTF-S2 MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Back] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 900 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-80 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-S6 MTF value 6 setting: vert scan [Back] DFCH-R2 Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
  • Page 901 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-81 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH-G2 Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side] MTF2-M12 MTF value 12 setting: horz scan [Front] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 902 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-82 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD MTF-M10 MTF value 10 setting: horz scan [Back] MTF-S11 MTF value 11 setting: vert scan [Back] Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. Lv.1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
  • Page 903 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD 8-83 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD COPIER > ADJUST > CCD DFCH-K2 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back] DFTBK-G Shading target value (G) [Back side] Lv.1 Details To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper Lv.1 Details When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
  • Page 904 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-84 ■ IMG-REG COPIER > ADJUST > CCD CCD-CHG2 Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG Lv.1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at REG-H-Y Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper back).
  • Page 905 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-85 COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG REG-HS-C Fine adj C write start pstn: horz scan REG-V-K Adj Bk-color write start pstn: vert scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal Lv.1 Details To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel or less.
  • Page 906 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG 8-86 COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG MAG-H Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the standard magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction by increasing/decreasing the number of pixels. The adjustment result is reflected to all colors.
  • Page 907 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-87 ■ DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS REF-M M toner dens target VL entry COPIER > ADJUST > DENS Lv.1 Details To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (M) of ATR control after SGNL-Y Enter Y toner dens VL: initialization RAM clear.
  • Page 908 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-88 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS SIGG-C Adj C toner dens gain value: ATR control T-SPLY-M [Not used] Lv.1 Details To adjust the gain value of the C toner density target value at ATR T-SPLY-C [Not used] control.
  • Page 909 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-89 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS DMAX-M Adj D-max ctrl M-color dens target VL P-TG-M Adj of ATR control M-color target value Lv.2 Details An image failure might occur because the density target value of the Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M.
  • Page 910 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-90 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS P-TG-K Adj of ATR control Bk-color target value REF-K Bk toner dens target VL entry Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk. Lv.2 Details To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (Bk) of ATR control after When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the...
  • Page 911 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS 8-91 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS COPIER > ADJUST > DENS DMLMT-HK Adj Bk-clr charge DC voltage upper limit DMLMT-LC Adj C-clr charge DC voltage lower limit Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Bk in Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for C in D-max control.
  • Page 912 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK 8-92 ■ BLANK COPIER > ADJUST > DENS CONT-C ATR Sensor (C) control voltage entry COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Lv.1 Details To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (C). BLANK-T Adjustment of leading edge margin When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the...
  • Page 913 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-93 ■ V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VCONT-C Adj of C-color contrast potential COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for C. VCONT-Y Adj of Y-color contrast potential As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by Lv.2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for Y.
  • Page 914 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-94 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT VBACK-Y Adj Y-color fogging removal potential VBACK-C Adj C-color fogging removal potential Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y. Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C.
  • Page 915 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT 8-95 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT PT-VCT-Y Adj of Y-color target contrast potntl PT-VCT-C Adj of C-color target contrast potntl Lv.2 Details To adjust the Y patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL Lv.2 Details To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for D-max PASCAL control.
  • Page 916 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL 8-96 ■ PASCAL COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL OFST-P-K Bk density adj at test print reading COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto OFST-P-Y Y density adj at test print reading gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
  • Page 917 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-97 ■ COLOR COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR ADJ-K Bk-color balance adjustment COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR Lv.1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the ADJ-Y Y color balance adjustment density of Bk varies between machines.
  • Page 918 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-98 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR OFST-M Adj of M bright area dens&color balance OFST-K Adj Bk bright area dens&color balance Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M. Lv.1 Details To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk.
  • Page 919 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-99 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR LD-OFS-C Color balance adj of C low dens area MD-OFS-M Color balance adj of M mid dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M.
  • Page 920 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-100 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR HD-OFS-Y Color balance adj of Y high dens area HD-OFS-K Color balance adj of Bk high dens area Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk.
  • Page 921 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR 8-101 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR PL-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk low dens area:PDL PM-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area:PDL Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk at PDL print. Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
  • Page 922 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-102 ■ HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR PH-OFS-K Clr blnce adj of Bk high dens area:PDL COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI Lv.2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk at PDL DIS-TGY Discharge crrnt ctrl Y tgt crrnt:1/1SPD print.
  • Page 923 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-103 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI DIS-TGK Discharge crrnt ctrl Bk tgt crrnt:1/1SPD DIS-TGC2 Dischg crrnt ctrl C tgt crrnt:1/2,1/3SPD Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon discharging Lv.2 Details To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharging current control for plain paper at 1/1 speed.
  • Page 924 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-104 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFSTAC-M Adj M charge AC voltage (1/1 speed) OFSTAC-K Adj Bk charge AC voltage (1/1 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M. Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Bk.
  • Page 925 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI 8-105 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI OFSTACM2 Adj M charge AC voltage (1/2 speed) OFSTACK2 Adj Bk charge AC voltage (1/2 speed) Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M at 1/2 speed. Lv.1 Details To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Bk at 1/2 speed.
  • Page 926 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-106 ■ HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Pry trns ATVC Bk target current: 1-clr COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Lv.2 Details To adjust the target current for the Bk-color primary transfer current. 1TR-TGY Adj of prmry trns ATVC Y target current Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs with Bk-...
  • Page 927 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-107 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-P1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 1st,L-hmdy 2TR-H2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 2nd,L-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of postcard in Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
  • Page 928 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-108 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-N12 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 1st,N-hmdy 2TR-H22 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy1 2nd,N-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of plain paper 1 Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 1 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
  • Page 929 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-109 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-P12 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 1st,N-hmdy 2TR-N23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln1 2nd,H-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of postcard in Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of plain paper 1 secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
  • Page 930 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-110 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-UH13 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy3 1st,H-hmdy 2TR-P23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: crd 2nd,H-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of heavy paper 3 Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of postcard in in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
  • Page 931 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-111 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-O13 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V: transp, H-hmdy 2TR-T1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,L-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for transparency in secondary Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
  • Page 932 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-112 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-T12 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,N-hmdy 2TR-T13 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:thin 1st,H-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of thin paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
  • Page 933 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-113 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-R1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 1st,L-hmdy 2TR-R12 Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 1st,N-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of recycled paper Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of recycled paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at low humidity.
  • Page 934 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-114 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-R23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:rcycl 2nd,H-hmdy 2TR-HN12 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 1st,N-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of recycled Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 1st side of plain paper 2 paper in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
  • Page 935 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-115 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-HN23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:pln2 2nd,H-hmdy 2TR-SH2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy2 2nd,L-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of plain paper 2 Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at high humidity.
  • Page 936 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-116 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-SH22 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy2 2nd,N-hmdy 2TR-E2 Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 2nd,L-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of an envelope in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
  • Page 937 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-117 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 2TR-E22 Sec trn ATVC ppr allotV:envlp 2nd,N-hmdy 2TR-SH23 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V:hvy2 2nd,H-hmdy Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of an envelope Lv.1 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage for the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 in secondary transfer ATVC control at normal humidity.
  • Page 938 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 8-118 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TGM2 Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed 1TR-TGY3 Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed Lv.2 Details To adjust the target current for the M-color primary transfer current at Lv.2 Details To adjust the target current for the Y-color primary transfer current at 1/2 speed.
  • Page 939 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-119 ■ FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR 1TR-TK13 Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1-clr, 1/3SPD COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Lv.2 Details To adjust the target current for the Bk-color primary transfer current REGIST Adj of registration start timing: Plain in single color mode at 1/3 speed.
  • Page 940 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-120 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2 Cassette 2 write start pstn in horz scan ADJ-C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 2.
  • Page 941 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-121 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK Paper Deck write start pstn in horz scan ADJ-C2RE Write start pstn in horz scan: Cst2,2nd Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck.
  • Page 942 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-122 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4RE Write start pstn in horz scan: Cst4,2nd ADJ-MFRE Write start pstn in horz scan:MP Tr, 2nd Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the Lv.1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette...
  • Page 943 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ 8-123 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side LP-MULT1 MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain Lv.1 Details To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON Lv.1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain the Registration Motor when feeding the second side of plain paper.
  • Page 944 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-124 ■ CST-ADJ ■ MISC COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ COPIER > ADJUST > MISC MF-A4R Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width SEG-ADJ Set criteria for text/photo: front side Lv.1 Details To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
  • Page 945 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-125 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-CNT Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front SEG-ADJ3 Set criteria for text/photo: back side Lv.2 Details To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color Lv.1 Details To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map presence in ACS mode.
  • Page 946 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC 8-126 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC COPIER > ADJUST > MISC ACS-EN3 Set judgment area in ACS mode:back SH-ADJ2 Adjustment of sharpness: back side Lv.2 Details To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading Lv.1 Details To adjust the sharpness of images on the second side of a with 1 path).
  • Page 947 Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED 8-127 ■ EXP-LED COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED PR-EXP-K Setting of Bk Pre-exposure LED current COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED Lv.2 Details To set the current of the Pre-exposure LED (Bk). PR-EXP-Y Setting of Y Pre-exposure LED current Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost.

  • Page 948: Function

    Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-128 FUNCTION COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) INIT-C [Not used] ■ INSTALL INIT-K [Not used] STRD-POS Scan position auto adj in DADF mode COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) Lv.1 Details To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically. STIR-Y Stirring of Y-color developer Use case At DADF installation/uninstallation Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 949 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-129 COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) INISET-Y Exe of Y Dev Ass'y initial install mode INISET-M Exe of M Dev Ass'y initial install mode Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Y Developing Assembly.
  • Page 950 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-130 COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) INISET-C Exe of C Dev Ass'y initial install mode RGW-PORT Set port number of Sales Co's server Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of Lv.1 Details To set the port number of the sales company's server to be used for the C Developing Assembly.
  • Page 951 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-131 COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) CNT-DATE Set counter send start date to SC server INISET-4 All color Dev Ass'y initial instal mode Lv.1 Details To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of information to the sales company's server.
  • Page 952 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL 8-132 COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) COPIER(1)>FUNCTION(4)>INSTALL(1)(list:29) INISET-K Exe of Bk Dev Ass'y initial instal mode CDS-CTL Set country/area when using CDS Lv.1 Details To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of Lv.1 Details To set country/area to enable CDS. the Bk Developing Assembly.
  • Page 953 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD 8-133 ■ CCD COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD MTF-CLC Deriving of MTF filter coefficient COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Lv.1 Details To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the DF-WLVL1 White level adj in book mode: color MTF value of the DADF complex chart.
  • Page 954 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER 8-134 ■ LASER COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER LD-ADJ-K Return Bk Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER Lv.2 Details When Bk-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger LD-ADJ-Y Return Y Skew Crrct Motor to ini pstn than estimation, the Image Skew Correction Motor (Bk) is locked, and...
  • Page 955 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC 8-135 ■ DPC COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC DRMRSETC Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Lv.1 Details To execute the same operation as warm-up rotation forcibly. DRMRSETY Forcible exe of Y Drum replacement mode At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according...
  • Page 956 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING 8-136 ■ CST ■ CLEANING COPIER > FUNCTION > CST COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING MF-A4R Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width DEVL-CLN Cleaning of Developing Assembly Lv.1 Details To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the Lv.1 Details To clean the Developing Assembly by forcibly consuming deteriorated Multi-purpose Tray.
  • Page 957 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK 8-137 ■ PANEL ■ PART-CHK COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing Specification of operation Clutch Lv.1 Details To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Lv.1 Details To specify the Clutch to operate.
  • Page 958 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK 8-138 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK FAN-ON Operation check of Fan Specification of operation Motor Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN. Lv.1 Details To specify the Motor to operate.
  • Page 959 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-139 ■ CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK MTR-ON Operation check of Motor COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Lv.1 Details To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR. Clear of error code The operation automatically stops after operation of 5 seconds.
  • Page 960 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-140 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR ADRS-BK Clear of address book MN-CON RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board Lv.1 Details To clear the address book data. Lv.1 Details To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
  • Page 961 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-141 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR CA-KEY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair KEY-CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board Lv.2 Details To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are Lv.2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security Kit) additionally registered by the user.
  • Page 962 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 8-142 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR 1TR-CLR Clear of primary transfer ATVC log LANG-CLR Uninstallation of language files Lv.2 Details Although primary transfer ATVC control is executed based on the log Lv.2 Details To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files.
  • Page 963 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 8-143 ■ MISC-R COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R 1PCLBSET DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R Lv.1 Details To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference SCANLAMP Light-up check of LED side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream...
  • Page 964 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P 8-144 ■ MISC-P COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R SCANLMP2 Light-up check of LED Lamp Unit: back COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Lv.1 Details To light up the LED Lamp Unit for back side, which is placed in the P-PRINT Output of service mode setting value ADF, and check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in...
  • Page 965 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P 8-145 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P PJH-P-1 Detail info of print job log: 100 jobs RPT-FILE Saving of service report as a file Lv.1 Details To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed Lv.1 Details To save various service reports in HDD as a file.
  • Page 966 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-146 ■ SYSTEM COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DEBUG-1 Setting of log type and save timing COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Lv.2 Details To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in the DOWNLOAD Shift to download mode HDD.
  • Page 967 Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM 8-147 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM Lv.2 Details To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of problem occurrence...
  • Page 968 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-148 OPTION COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW DH-SW ON/OFF of auto adjustment (D-half/D-max) ■ FNC-SW Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of auto adjustment (D-half/D-max control). D-half/D-max control that is set to OFF is not executed at warm-up COPIER >...
  • Page 969 - When picking up special paper size original from DADF YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. AA: Paper size configuration...
  • Page 970 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-150 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW INTROT-1 Ppr intvl/last rotn auto adj exe intvl MODELSZ2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode Lv.1 Details To set paper interval to execute discharge current control and primary Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in transfer ATVC at paper interval/last rotation.
  • Page 971 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-151 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW FXWRNLVL Set Fix Film life display threshold VL PDF-RDCT PDF reduction set at forwarding Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film. Lv.2 Details To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting When COPIER>...
  • Page 972 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-152 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW CARD-RNG Card number setting (department number) SJOB-CL Set of scan job canceling by logout Lv.2 Details To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Lv.1 Details To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the Card Reader.
  • Page 973 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-153 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW UNLMTBND Over 400 binders print job support set W/RAID Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation Lv.1 Details To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders. Lv.1 Details To set installation state of HDD Mirroring Kit.
  • Page 974 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-154 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW PSCL-MS Set of auto gradation adjustment: Heavy IMGCNTPR Setting of image quality mode Lv.1 Details To set at which speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, or 1/3 speed) PASCAL Lv.1 Details To set the image quality mode.
  • Page 975 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-155 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW LOCLFIRM Set to allow firmware update by file FAX-INT Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode Lv.1 Details To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the Lv.2 Details To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
  • Page 976 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-156 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW AMSOFFSW Disabling AMS mode MIB-NVTA RFC-compatible character stringMIB write Lv.1 Details Normally, AMS mode is automatically enabled when the following 2 Lv.1 Details As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order conditions are satisfied.
  • Page 977 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW 8-157 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW BXSHIFT Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin T-DLV-BK Pre-toner low alarm send timing:Bk toner Lv.1 Details To set whether to judge the job as a job “without binding” when storing Lv.2 Details To set the remaining toner level to send the pre-toner low alarm.
  • Page 978 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-158 ■ DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW JM-ERR-R Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW Lv.2 Details To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071. UI-COPY Display/hide of copy screen By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of the Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 979 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-159 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW T-LW-LVL Dspl timing of toner level warning mssg FXMSG-SW ON/OFF of Fixing Ass’y rplce message Lv.2 Details To set the threshold value of residual toner in the toner container. Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the Fixing When COPIER>...
  • Page 980 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-160 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-EPRNT Display/hide of extended print screen BRWS-FAV Set of service browser favorite register Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print Lv.1 Details To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for screen for print server).
  • Page 981 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW 8-161 COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW FCOT-DSP ON/OFF of FCOT priority mode in usermode SCT-BTN Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit Lv.1 Details To set whether to display “Color/Black Priority for First Print Time” in Lv.1 Details To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear at user mode.
  • Page 982 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-162 ■ NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK POP3PN Setting of POP3 reception port number COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK Lv.2 Details To set POP3 reception port number. RAW-DATA Setting of received data print mode Use case Upon user’s request Lv.2 Details...
  • Page 983 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-163 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK NS-CMD5 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth NS-PLN Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv.2 Details To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of Lv.2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext SMTP authentication.
  • Page 984 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-164 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK MEAP-SSL HTTPS port setting of MEAP WUEV-RTR Setting of sleep notification range Lv.2 Details To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of Lv.2 Details To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep MEAP.
  • Page 985 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-165 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK DNSTRANS Setting of DNS transfer priority 802XTOUT Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout Lv.1 Details To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS Lv.1 Details To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
  • Page 986 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-166 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK IPSDEBLV Setting of IPSec debug level ILOGMODE Setting of Firewall range Lv.2 Details For R&D use Lv.1 Details To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of Firewall. When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and Use case For R&D use...
  • Page 987 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-167 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK PFWFTPRT Setting of IP Filter FTP PRCLTYPE Setting of dedicated protocol type Lv.1 Details When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from Lv.2 Details To switch the type of dedicated protocol.
  • Page 988 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK 8-168 COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK SSLMODE Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close SSL30 ON/OFF of SSL 3.0 Lv.2 Details To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port. Lv.2 Details To set whether to use SSL 3.0 with the installed machine.
  • Page 989 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET 8-169 ■ SOUND ■ ENV-SET COPIER > OPTION > SOUND COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET DRM-RTIM Set Drum line prev sequence exe interval ENVP-INT Temp, humid &Fix Film temp log get cycle Lv.2 Details To set the time interval to rotate the Photosensitive Drum at standby Lv.1 Details...
  • Page 990 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING 8-170 ■ CLEANING COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING ITBB-TMG Set of drum/ITB cleaning band interval COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING Lv.1 Details To set the intervals at which a band of ATR patches is formed at last OHP-PTH Set of ITB clean transp threshold value rotation as a measure to prevent flipping of the Drum Cleaner.
  • Page 991 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-171 ■ FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW USZ-FEED ON/OFF Job set/ppr source ppr size chck COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW Lv.1 Details To set whether to check if the paper size set for the job matches the EVLP-SPD Envelope feeding speed setting paper size set on the paper source.
  • Page 992 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW 8-172 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW MFENV-Y3 Lift-P press:MP Tr pckup, envlp(Y-naga3) MFENV-DL Lift Plt press: MP Tr pckup, envlp (DL) Lv.1 Details To set the Lifting Plate pressure mode when feeding an envelope Lv.1 Details To set the Lifting Plate pressure mode when feeding an envelope (DL) (Yougatanaga 3) from the Multi-purpose Tray.
  • Page 993 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD 8-173 ■ IMG-SPD COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Set of ARCDAT interruption interval COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD Lv.2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control FX-D-TMP Set small paper down sequence start temp is executed.
  • Page 994 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR 8-174 ■ IMG-RDR COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR DF2DSTL1 Adj Bk line crrct lvl:ppr intvl,bck,DADF COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR Lv.1 Details To adjust the black line correction level with dust detection correction DFDST-L1 Adj black line crrct lvl:ppr intvl, DADF control that is executed by the Scanner Unit (for back side) in DADF...
  • Page 995 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-175 ■ IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON PRN-FLG Select of image area flag (PDL image) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON Lv.2 Details To set the image area flag for the image processing which is PASCAL Use/no use of auto gradation adj data performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified...
  • Page 996 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-176 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON TMIC-BK ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct MIX-FLG Set img processing at img composition Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and Lv.2 Details To set the image processing which is performed when an image for copy which are used by TMIC.
  • Page 997 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-177 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON IFXEML-Z Set img proc at clr iFAX,mail recv print REDU-CNT Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj Lv.1 Details To set the image processing which is performed when printing color Lv.2 Details To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment iFAX or received e-mail.
  • Page 998 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON 8-178 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON VP-TXT Set of character vectorization process AST-SEL Adj of advanced smoothing effect Lv.2 Details To set vectorization processing for text on scalable PDF. Lv.2 Details To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing In the vectorization processing, a binary image outline is extracted in...
  • Page 999 Lv.1 Details To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in an standard paper (Canon-recommended paper). HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment. When 1 is set, the parameters are optimized for 64 g/m2 paper.
  • Page 1000 Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV 8-180 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV INTPPR-1 Set of ARCDAT interruption interval DVTGT-Y Adj of ATR Sensor (Y) gain value offset Lv.2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control Lv.2 Details To actually correct the TD ratio by setting the offset of the gain value of is executed.

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner advance c5250 seriesImagerunner advance c5240 seriesImagerunner advance c5235 series

Table of Contents

Save PDF